Home

R&S®FSW-K95 802.11ad Measurements User Manual

1. 207 9 1 Common Suffixes For the description of the remote commands in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application the following common suffixes are used Table 9 1 Common suffixes for IEEE 802 11ad measurements on I Q data Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt k gt 1 8 Limit 9 2 9 2 1 Introduction Suffix Value range Description lt t gt 1 Trace lt m gt 1 4 Marker Table 9 2 Common suffixes for SEM measurements Suffix Value range Description lt n gt 1 16 Window lt t gt 1 6 Trace lt m gt 1 16 Marker lt ch gt 1 18 Tx channel Channel 1 11 ALTernate or ADJa cent channel lt k gt 1 8 Limit line Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands or events and request information query commands Some commands can only be used in one way others work in two ways setting and query If not indicated otherwise the com mands can be used for settings and queries The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a header and in most cases one or more parameters To use a command as a query you have to append a question mark after the last header element even if the command contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are sep
2. 188 FETCh EVM PILot MINimum gl Kee 189 FEDCHE TIME MAXIMUM d 189 FETCI FTIMe MINIITIUITIE o cero eret ere cott c eerte eerte etre dev eoe tetra nece dain tte ner et eei n 189 FETCh GIMBalance AVERage FETCh GIMBalance MAXimum FETCh GIMBalarice MINIMUM RE 189 RER ee e 189 h nt eeler 189 FETCmIQOFISet MINIMUM KE 189 FETCH QUAD EMORAV GE 189 FETCh QUADerror MAXimum 4 FETCh QUAbDertorMINITUI scii oiii cete Errore i rb erroe oi Eee RO EU E E ri nae FETCH RTIMG AVERAGG Pas isvcesccueasezsssascceencencoatyasier saevien EXE e PASE DESEE BERE RUNE CER e Re OEE E EE RE EXTERN ERRARE RR VETE 189 FETGHR TIME MAXIMUM s coca rtr ree retener eer eee e PR TERT EO RA FERRE REP k ERRORS 189 FETGhIRTIMeE MINIIUETE ico Fre oe er reco eer e ERR E DRE EF EE REY WERE ER ERE ERE ERROR 189 FETCh SYMBolernror VERSOS ucc ms kept tn pe etg Era Spr costeaapantien SE eA Ee EEA EAEN TEPENE 190 FETCh SYMBolerror MAXI percentage lee reete tereti caveret Py dati d A 190 FETCh SYMBolerror MINimum ge FETCH TDPOWeEAVERSEST cisisceniescencastecsasqeretecosvenssstcascanaeacs coms vsersanstpieetcosueubans ET ee a net sex TERMES eue 190 FETCH T DPOWer E le 190 FETCH ei See lr Marin EE 190 FETCH TSKEW AVE E 190 FETCH TSKEW MAXIMUIN scc aa ae te vor vendre EE EVER e Fees RAV CRE EO nearer 190 FETCH TSKew MINIPRQUET strae rk ert nr vertere ner besar cer d a TS
3. RF Results remote Trace results remote entrent RF attenuation PUNO P MENGE H aimer Overload protection ais Overload protection remote sss 115 i o 115 RF measurements ICI 87 Configuration remote Se Results remote eege eer EA 190 Step DY step e rennen 101 RF overrange External Mixet 2 rtt rentes RF Power Mg Trigger level remote RUN CONT co Y 79 RUN SINGLE co 80 S SANDS ALS estote teet tio ure td e nM te 13 Samples INUIMD GP eirca ioter e v dee teia oc ei ra ceta 13 Scaling Amplitude range automatically 83 Automatic EE KE e E 163 SEM Configuring cdma2000 IEEE 802 11ad Programming example SEM measurements elt le ie WE 84 SOQUGMICER gute EET 10 Aborting remote 170 Activating remote esee 170 Mode remote erret tnos teens 170 Ini EE 169 Settings 9l O 45 Signal capturing DUFAUOMN e Remote control ES ej cm E Signal ID External MiXer rsss reto etn Dan 54 External Mixer Remote control 118 Signal source REMO doctos oai a ecu t ee etis 115
4. 70 L Attenuation Mode Value tentent netten tees 70 Using Electronic GREEN eR RR LIRE ER A 70 gerer upper C ndetin ie 71 L Preamplifier cccccescscscsescscscseescecscecscscscscsesesesevsssvecsesssesssesevevecsesesseesesesenanes 71 Reference Level The reference level is also used to scale power diagrams the reference level is then used as the maximum on the y axis IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Since the hardware of the R amp S FSW is adapted according to this value it is recom mended that you set the reference level close above the expected maximum signal level to ensure an optimum measurement no compression good signal to noise ratio Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 138 Shifting the Display Offset Reference Level Defines an arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level In some result displays the scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly Define an offset if the signal is attenuated or amplified before it is fed into the R amp S FSW so the application shows correct power results All displayed power level results will be shifted by this value The setting range is 200 dB in 0 01 dB steps Note however that the internal reference level used to adjust the hardware settings to the expected signal optimally ignores any Reference Level Offset Thus it is impor tant to keep in
5. Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INF NINF Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN 9 2 6 2 9 2 6 3 9 2 6 4 9 2 6 5 Introduction Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Character Data Character data follows the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 9 2 2 Long and Short Form on page 105 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Character Strings Strings are alphanumeric characters They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spec
6. OFDM Symbol N Ini Qui Ino Qu zl lune Qu Ns Pilots Only CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect PILOTS Nsp pairs of and Q data per OFDM Symbol in the natural number order OFDM Symbol 1 li 4 Q4 4 l1 2Q1 2 ven Q1 Nsp OFDM Symbol 2 121 Q21 122 Q2 l2 uso Q2 Nsp OFDM Symbol N Uu Qu usual IN Nsp Qu nen e Single carrier 1 pair of and Q data per OFDM Symbol for the selected carrier CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect k with ke t Nused E 1 2 eg Nusea 1 2 JL Nusea ES 1 2 OFDM Symbol 1 I 4 Q4 4 OFDM Symbol 2 l4 Q21 OFDM Symbol N lu Dua 9 10 4 3 EVM vs Symbol EVM value as measured for each symbol over the complete capture period Each EVM value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of dBm Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 192 ASCii REAL 9 10 4 4 Frequency Error vs Symbol Frequency offset as measured for each symbol over the complete capture period Each offset value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of Hz 9 10 4 5 9 10 4 6 9 10 4 7 9 10 4 8 9 10 4 9 9 10 4 10 Retrieving Results Header Info The TRAC DATA command returns the information as read from the header for each analyzed PPDU The header bit sequence is converted to an equivalent sequence of hexadecimal digits for each analyzed PPDU in transmit order That is the first tra
7. 65 Noise ee 65 drerit P 65 L Output TYPO NITE D 66 E 66 E al 66 EE UN o T EE 66 IF Video Output Defines the type of signal available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD on the rear panel of the R amp S FSW For restrictions and additional information see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which this value is available is defined in IF Wide Out Frequency on page 65 IF 2 GHz Out The measured IF value is provided at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output con nector if available at a frequency of 2 GHz If the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option is installed and active this is the only option available for IF output When the B2000 option is activated the basic IF OUT 2 GHZ output is automatically deactivated It is not reactivated when the B2000 option is switched off For details see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Man ual Remote command OUTPut IF SOURce on page 134 IF Wide Out Frequency Defines or indicates the frequency at which the IF signal level is provided at the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if IF Video Output is set to IF Note The IF output frequency of the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector cannot be defined manually but is determined automatically d
8. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt STATe State This command turns the mutliple zoom on and off Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window If you turn off one of the zoom windows all subsequent zoom windows move up one position Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Retrieving Results The following commands are required to retrieve the results from a IEEE 802 11ad measurement in a remote environment The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the trigger or data capturing settings are held off until after the data capture is completed and the data has been returned e Numeric Modulation Accuracy Results cese 185 e Numeric Results for SEM Measuremente eee 190 e Relieving Trace LE 191 e Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACEems sss 195 e JRetneving Marker Results rec rrr EP EH ERE RR REPRE 198 e Importing and Exporting UO Data and Resuhts sss 200 e Exporting Trace Results to an ASON File eoe tee ett cette 201 9 10 1 d 9 10 1 1 Retrieving Results Numeric Modulation Accuracy Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the numeric results from the stand ard IEEE 802 11ad measurements The commands to retrieve results from SEM measurements for IEEE 802 11ad signals are described in chapter 9 10 2 Numeric Results for SEM Measurements on page 190 e PPDU and
9. CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Analysis The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next lower peak Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next lower peak The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next minimum value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a marker to the next minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker pos
10. Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the position of a marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 169 9 10 6 Retrieving Results Return values lt Result gt Result at the marker position Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker Table on page 30 See Marker Peak List on page 30 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 Importing and Exporting UO Data and Results The I Q data to be evaluated in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application can not only be measured by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application itself it can also be imported t
11. Examples xyz complex 1ch float32 e xyz polar 1ch float64 e xyz eal 1ch int16 xyz complex 16ch int8 Q Data File Format iq tar Element UserData Description Optional contains user application or device specific XML data which is not part of the iq tar specification This element can be used to store additional information e g the hardware configuration User data must be valid XML content PreviewData Optional contains further XML elements that provide a preview of the UO data The preview data is determined by the routine that saves an iq tar file e g R amp S FSW For the definition of this element refer to the RsIqTar xsd schema Note that the preview can be only displayed by current web browsers that have JavaScript enabled and if the XSLT stylesheet open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt is available Example ScalingFactor Data stored as in t16 and a desired full scale voltage of 1 V ScalingFactor 1 V maximum int16 value 1 V 215 3 0517578125e 5 V Scaling Factor Numerical value Numerical value x ScalingFac tor Minimum negative int16 value 215 32768 1V Maximum positive int16 value 215 1 32767 0 999969482421875 V Example PreviewData in XML lt PreviewData gt lt ArrayOfChannel length 1 gt lt Channel gt PowerVs1 Min lt Arra SEX lt fl l ime yOfFloat length 256 gt oat 134 float oat
12. If necessary the command activates the delta marker and positions a reference marker to the peak power Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute x value of delta marker 1 Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 See X value on page 92 General Marker Settings GAL Gulatespn sMARKersmed INK 2222 orca nit anu btt rera EG an edad ba aa aed aa Yon e aa rave x dara ee 176 EES Element ee EES 176 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK State This command defines whether all markers within the selected result display are linked If enabled and you move one marker along the x axis all other markers in the display are moved to the same x axis position The suffix lt m gt is irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC2 MARK LINK ON DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Turns the marker table on OFF Turns the marker table off AUTO Turns the marker table on if 3 or more markers are active RST AUTO Example DISP MTAB ON Activates the marker table Manual operation See Marker Table Display on page 94 9 9 1 3 9 9 1 4 Analysis Configuring and Performing a Marker Search The following commands control the marker search CAL Culate nzM Abkercm LOENclude eite enint nn nnns nnne nen 177 CALCUlatesn E E E EE 177 C
13. Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM STATe State This command turns the zoom on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DISP ZOOM ON Activates the zoom mode 9 9 3 2 Using the Multiple Zoom DISPlay WINDow n ZOOM MULTiple zoom AREA sessi 183 DiSblavlfWiNDow nztZOOM ML Tiple z0oomzGTATe nrn nn ne 184 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTiple lt zoom gt AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area for a multiple zoom To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on 1 Frequency Sweep iRm o User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 183 9 10 Retrieving Results 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75 Suffix lt zoom gt 1 4 Selects the zoom window Parameters lt x1 gt lt y1 gt Diagram coordinates in of the complete diagram that define lt x2 gt lt y2 gt the zoom area The lower left corner is the origin of coordinate system The upper right corner is the end point of the system Range 0 to 100 Default unit PCT
14. State ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 All detected PPDUs in the current capture buffer are evaluated ON 1 The IEEE 802 11ad I Q results are based on one individual PPDU only namely the defined using SENSe BURSt SELect on page 151 As soon as a new measurement is star ted the evaluation range is reset to all PPDUs in the current capture buffer RST 0 Example SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 2 Results are based on the PPDU number 2 only Manual operation See PPDU to Analyze Index of Specific PPDU on page 87 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal State If enabled only PPDUs with a specific number of symbols are considered for mea surement analysis Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement If disabled only PPDUs whose length is within a specified range are considered The number of symbols is specified by the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN command A range of data symbols is defined as a minimum and maximum number of symbols the payload may contain see SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX on page 152 and SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN on page 152 Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX lt NumDataSymbols gt If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the maximum number of payload symbols allo
15. offset gt 0 Start of the measurement is delayed offset 0 Measurement starts earlier pre trigger Remote command TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 143 Hysteresis Trigger Source Defines the distance in dB to the trigger level that the trigger source must exceed before a trigger event occurs Settting a hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level This setting is only available for IF Power trigger sources The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 143 Trigger Holdoff Trigger Source Defines the minimum time in seconds that must pass between two trigger events Trigger events that occur during the holdoff time are ignored Remote command TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 143 Slope Trigger Source For all trigger sources except time you can define whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe on page 145 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described
16. 0 00 00E 006 00E 006 00E 006 00E 009 35E 001 31E 001 5033 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 A A 1 A 2 References Referents E 211 e VQ Data File Format Iq tar cemeterio 211 References 1 IEEE IEEE Std 802 11ad 2012 Part 11 Wireless LAN Medium Access Control MAC and Physical Layer PHY Specifications Amendment 3 Enhancements for Very High Throughput in the 60 GHz Band UO Data File Format iq tar UO data is packed in a file with the extension iq tar An ig tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate UO data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the UO data in a web browser and allows you to include user specific data The iq tar container packs several files into a single tar archive file Files in tar format can be unpacked using standard archive tools see http en wikipedia org wiki Comparison of file archivers available for most operating systems The advantage of tar files is that the archived files inside the tar file are not changed not com pressed and thus it is possible to read the UO data directly within the archive without the need to unpack untar the tar file first Contained
17. 115 dizi mesi E 115 ele EE 115 INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet This command resets the attenuator and reconnects the RF input with the input mixer after an overload condition occured and the protection mechanism intervened The error status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register and the INPUT OVLD message in the status bar are cleared The command works only if the overload condition has been eliminated first Usage Event INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt This command selects the coupling type of the RF input Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC AC coupling DC DC coupling RST AC Example INP COUP DC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Input Coupling on page 49 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements i e it defines which con nector is used to input data to the R amp S FSW Parameters lt Source gt RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector FIQ UO data file selected by INPut FILE PATH on page 116 For details see chapter 4 3 2 Basics on Input from I Q Data Files on page 37 RST RF Manual operation See Radio Frequency State on page 48 See UO Input File State on page 50 9 5 1 2 9 5 1 3 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Input from UO Data Files The input for measurements can be provided from UO data files The commands required to configure the
18. 142 float fl oat 140 float ArrayOfFloat Min Max lt ArrayOfFloat length 256 float 70 float float 71 float float 69 float ArrayOfFloat Max PowerVsTime Spectrum Min ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt float 133 float float 111 float A 2 2 Q Data File Format iq tar lt float gt 111 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Min gt lt Max gt ArrayOfFloat length 256 gt lt float gt 67 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt float gt 70 lt float gt lt float gt 69 lt float gt lt ArrayOfFloat gt lt Max gt lt Spectrum gt IQ lt Histogram width 64 height 64 gt 0123456789 0 lt Histogram gt IQ lt Channel gt lt ArrayOfChannel gt lt PreviewData gt UO Data Binary File The I Q data is saved in binary format according to the format and data type specified in the XML file see Format element and DataType element To allow reading and writing of streamed UO data all data is interleaved i e complex values are interleaved pairs of and Q values and multi channel signals contain interleaved complex sam ples for channel 0 channel 1 channel 2 etc If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is presumed Example Element order for real data 1 channel I 0 Real sample 0 I 1 Real sample 1 I 2 Real sample 2
19. OSCilloscope TCPip on page 132 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC LEDS Result GREEN Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip Address Defines the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW via LAN Note The IP address is maintained after a PRESET and is transferred between appli cations Parameters Address computer name or IP address Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP 192 0 2 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC TCP FSW43 12345 Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 61 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice Queries whether the connected instrument is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Return values lt State gt ON 1 Instrument is supported OFF 0 Instrument is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VDEV Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware Queries whether the firmware on the connected oscilloscope is supported by the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 option Return values lt State gt ON 1 Firmware is supported OFF 0 Firmware is not supported Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC VFIR Usage Query only TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling lt CoupType gt Configures the co
20. lt State gt Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 1 0 ON 1 Option is active OFF 0 Option is disabled RST 0 Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC ON Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Manual operation See B2000 State on page 61 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe Performs the alignment of the oscilloscope itself and the oscilloscope ADC for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The correction data for the oscilloscope including the connection cable between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo scope is recorded As a result the state of the alignment is returned Alignment is required only once after setup If alignment was performed successfully the alignment data is stored on the oscilloscope Thus alignment need only be repeated if one of the following applies e Anew oscilloscope is connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW e Anew cable is used between the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector of the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope e Anew firmware is installed on the oscilloscope Return values lt State gt Returns the state of the second alignment step ON 1 Alignment was successful OFF 0 Alignment was not yet
21. Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 75 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the magnitude the I Q data must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 130 dBm to 30 dBm RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IQP 30DBM Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 75 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level the RF input must exceed to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered The input signal must be between 500 MHz and 8 GHz Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 75 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Triggers when the signal rises to the trigger level rising edge NEGative Triggers when the signal drops to the trigger level falling edge RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG Manual operation See Slope on page 76 TRIGger
22. External Mixer remote control 120 External MIXet sisirin eterne 52 Presetting ENT E 47 Prethigget p 76 Programming examples 902 118 55i ee iet tret oen 207 External Mixer 2127 Modulation Accuracy 207 E 209 Protection RF input ssc RF input remote PvT Falling edge result display Full PPDU result display Rising edge result display PvT Full Burst Trace data tenete rere tens 197 Q Quiadrat re offsel aciei Se 16 zjlm P sands 13 R Range SCAN M Reference level Auto level 21 i cri iade rb ce nasini url as Remote commands Basics ofi Syntax i nere rege Boolean values Capitalization Character data Data blocks Numeric values ae Optional keywords tnn Rees 106 Paramelefs 2 2 2 d cepa creer ete ERE ito 106 Strings nm SIC M 105 Resetting RF input protection treten 36 115 Restoring Channel settings rre 47 Result configuration SOMKEY m M 80 Result displays EE EE 19 Channel frequency response ssesesees 20 Configuration remote 25 199 CONTUNHA M 44 Gonstellatioh EE 20 Diagram 4390 Evaluated data sisisi ritenere repos 87 EVM vs Symbol 25 eren 21 F
23. FSW K95 Measurement Basics eee When the overload protection is activated an error message is displayed in the status bar INPUT OVLD and a message box informs you that the RF Input was discon nected Furthermore a status bit bit 3 in the STAT QUES POW status register is set In this case you must decrease the level at the RF input connector and then close the message box Then measurement is possible again Reactivating the RF input is also possible via the remote command INPut ATTenuation PROTection RESet 4 3 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files The I Q data to be evaluated in a particular R amp S FSW application can not only be cap tured by the application itself it can also be loaded from a file provided it has the cor rect format The file is then used as the input source for the application For example you can capture UO data using the UO Analyzer application store it to a file and then analyze the signal parameters for that data later using the Pulse applica tion if available The I Q data must be stored in a format with the file extension iq tar For a detailed description see chapter A 2 UO Data File Format iq tar on page 211 As opposed to importing data from an UO data file using the import functions provided by some R amp S FSW applications e g the I Q Analyzer or the R amp S FSW VSA applica tion the data is not only stored temporarily in the capture buffer where it overwrites the curre
24. If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 30 See Marker Peak List on page 30 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 See X value on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF This command turns all delta markers off lt m gt is irrelevant Example CALC DELT AOFF Turns all delta markers off Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK State This command links delta marker m to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position x value of marker 1 delta marker m changes its horizontal position to the same value Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 LINK ON Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt State This command links delta marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker m2 If you change the horizontal position of marker m2 delta marker m1 changes its horizontal position to the same value Analysis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links
25. MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Table Config During each measurement a large number of statistical and characteristic values are determined The Result Summary result display provides an overview of the parame ters selected here You can configure which results are displayed in Result Summary displays see Result Summary on page 27 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility on the screen Note that the Result Configuration dialog box is window specific table configuration settings are only available if a table display is selected Table Config Units Y Scaling EVM All dB Rise Time s EVM Data Symbols dB Fall Time s EVM Pilot Symbols dB Time Skew s IQ Offset dB Time Domain Power dBm Gain Imbalance dB Crest Factor dB Quadrature Error 9 Header BER Center Freq Error Hz Payload BER Symbol Clock Error ppm Ge 3 Result Summary Select the parameters to be included in the table For a description of the individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt TABLe lt GroupName gt lt ParamName gt see chapter 9 7 3 Selecting Items to Display in Result Summary on page 163 5 2 8 2 Units Access Overview gt Result Config gt Units or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Units The unit for phase display is configurable This setting is described here User Manual 1177 5962 02 01
26. Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any IEEE 802 11ad menu Alternatively you can access the individual dialog boxes via softkeys from the corre sponding menus or via tools in the toolbars if available In this documentation only the most convenient method of accessing the dialog boxes is indicated usually via the Overview e Configuration OVetvieW dapi oe eterne tct e patere bnt piai peed e b oed 45 s input Outpul dnd Frontend Sets 5 etta t the teret tet ete 47 e Dette ACUS EE 71 Togel SENOS EN 72 TIN DEE 78 Autoimaltie SeMS EE 79 DNE oro uo m 79 e Ee le Te NEE 80 5 2 1 Configuration Overview Access all menus id ke Cw Throughout the measurement channel configuration an overview of the most important Overview currently defined settings is provided in the Overview R amp S9FSW K95 Configuration 0 00 dBm MCS Index D ime Samples ims 2 64e 06 0 dB e 2 a Q als Modulation Accuracy Input Center Freq Ref Level Source Att Level Meas Time B2000 State Offset Sample Rate Input Frontend Trigger Data Acquisition Er Tracking Evaluation Range Display Config Tracking PPDU To Analyse BN es Select Measurement The Overview not only shows the main measurement settings it also provides quick access to the main settings dialog boxes The indicated signal flow shows which parameters affect which processing stage in the
27. Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 118 Auto ID Threshold Defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison Auto ID on page 55 function The input range is between 0 1 dB and 100 dB Values of about 10 dB i e default set ting generally yield satisfactory results Remote command SENSe MIXer THReshold on page 118 Bias Settings Define the bias current for each range which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s The trace is adapted to the settings immediately so you can check the results To store the bias setting in the currently selected conversion loss table select the Write to lt CVL table name gt button Remote command SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW on page 117 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH on page 117 Write to CVL table name Bias Settings Stores the bias setting in the currently selected Conversion loss table for the range see Managing Conversion Loss Tables on page 55 If no conversion loss table is selected yet this function is not available CVL Table not selected Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 124 Managing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Fronte
28. SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt This command defines the trigger hysteresis which is only available for IF Power trig ger sources Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt Hysteresis gt Range 3 dB to 50 dB RST 3 dB Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value Manual operation See Hysteresis on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the level the external signal must exceed to cause a trigger event Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port 1 trigger port 1 TRIGGER INPUT connector on front panel 2 trigger port 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on front panel 3 trigger port 3 TRIGGER3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on rear panel Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt Range 0 5V to 3 5V RST 1 4V Example TRIG LEV 2V Manual operation See Trigger Level on page 75 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IF Power lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet RST 10 dBm
29. Single sweep MONKEY eege gege redia seat EEN 80 Slope MUO QGP ss dese teens ri Ote Ds OP AE aeos 76 145 SmartGrid Softkeys Amplitude en EE 68 Auto Level a GOMER E Continue Single Sweep eene 80 Cohtin ous SWEEP eiecit ere rore de cepe rp Coast dtd 79 Display Gonfig erret er rerit Ze 44 Export 96 Export config 96 External 74 Free RUM EE 74 Frequency Config nente ret 66 UO Power x IF Power ue e M 96 Input SOURCE CONTIG ET 48 IQ Export nes 96 IQ Import 96 Marker 1 16 91 Marker 1 Marker 2 16 91 Marker Config i1 nro eterne 90 Market to Tface ien D Eo ee eee 93 Norm Delta 4 92 Outputs e EE 64 Preamp 49 71 Ref EGVel cte recta tee OE 68 Ref Level OffSet nter eee een 69 Result Config erret ten 80 RE AtteriAUlo 2 1 coti en cete eR Dee 70 RF Atten Manual TO RF Power lS Signal Capture 71 Single Sweep 4 90 Sweep Config 19 SWEEP COUN e 80 Trace CONG ET 88 Trigger Config e Trigger Offset trt nr 76 Span MIU reete tss dh dicet eed 45 Specifics for Configuration rore tr retten 47 Standard IEEE 802 11ad measurements 13 Starting R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 10 EE ee EE 150 REMOTE M 150 Statistics Configurat
30. Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 148 Frequency Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Frequency IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement or FREQ gt Frequency Config Center 13 25 GHz Center Frequenc Stepsize 1 0 MHz Frequency Offset Centor FOUEN T T 67 Canter E Ee 67 Kreateur Offset a ssec neinir dinanti Ee Hed deeded ERSSEEE dee aed 67 Center frequency Defines the center frequency of the signal in Hertz Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 135 Center Frequency Stepsize Defines the step size by which the center frequency is increased or decreased using the arrow keys When you use the rotary knob the center frequency changes in steps of only 1 10 of the Center Frequency Stepsize The step size can be coupled to another value or it can be manually set to a fixed value Center Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency The used value is indicated in the Value field Manual Defines a fixed step size for the center frequency Enter the step size in the Value field Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 136 Frequency Offset Shifts the displayed frequency range along the x axis by the defined offset This parameter has no
31. by the R amp S FSW is not possible while the B2000 option is active Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe on page 130 TCPIP Address or Computer name When using the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 the entire measurement via the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector and an oscilloscope as well as both instruments are controlled by the R amp S FSW Thus the instruments must be connected via LAN and the TCPIP address or computer name of the oscilloscope must be defined on the R amp S FSW By default the TCPIP address is expected To enter the computer name toggle the 423 ABC button to ABC As soon as a name or address is entered the R amp S FSW attempts to establish a con nection to the oscilloscope If it is detected the oscilloscope s identity string is queried and displayed in the dialog box The alignment status is also displayed see Align ment on page 62 Note The IP address computer name is maintained after a PRESET and is transfer red between applications Remote command SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip on page 132 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN on page 131 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 61 R amp S FSW K95 Configuration Alignment Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Alignment An initial alignment of the output to the oscilloscope is required once after setup It need only be repeated if a new oscilloscope i
32. closes all measurement channels on the R amp S FSW except for the default Spectrum application channel Remote command SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute on page 113 Select Measurement Selects a measurement to be performed See chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 Specifics for The measurement channel may contain several windows for different results Thus the settings indicated in the Overview and configured in the dialog boxes vary depending on the selected window Select an active window from the Specifics for selection list that is displayed in the Overview and in all window specific configuration dialog boxes The Overview and dialog boxes are updated to indicate the settings for the selected window Input Output and Frontend Settings Access Overview 2 Input Frontend or INPUT OUTPUT The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals Importing and Exporting UO Data The I Q data to be analyzed for IEEE 802 11ad can not only be measured by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application itself it can also be imported to the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the analyzed UO data from the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application can be exported for further analysis in external applications See chapter 7 1 Import Export Functions on page 95 Frequency amplitude and y axis sca
33. electronic attenuation reduces the mechanical attenuation whenever possible Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt State gt 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 1 Example INP EATT AUTO OFF Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 70 INPut EATT STATe State This command turns the electronic attenuator on and off Parameters State 110 ON OFF 1 ON 0 OFF RST 0 Example INP EATT STAT ON Switches the electronic attenuator into the signal path Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 70 INPut GAIN VALue Gain This command selects the gain level if the preamplifier is activated INP GAIN STAT ON see INPut GAIN STATe on page 141 The command requires the additional preamplifier hardware option Parameters Gain 15 dB 30 dB The availability of gain levels depends on the model of the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW8 13 15dB and 30 dB R amp S FSW26 or higher 30 dB All other values are rounded to the nearest of these two RST OFF Example INP GAIN VAL 30 Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 49 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the preamplifier on and off It requires the optional preamplifier hardware Pa
34. k 47 96 Importing remote eese 200 Importing EXporting se onte tarte entente es 95 Input file uobis recortes eiue de toa ta De tends 50 Input fil remote issons 116 Tao mil cT 37 49 UO measurements Configuring remote sesseseeeeses 114 UO Mismatch CompelisSatiOnr x x e Der ds trece tne eodera ot ten 78 WTS Cia ch es a tne LLLI 13 15 UO Power TAGE accus cierto en id epi Cin me Due ett ne bete ena leis 75 Trigger level remote eese 144 IEEE 802 11ad Measurements icm circi tox saves xe Lin unge inks eR ons Measurements step by step Parameters adeste quaes Eed REMOTE control ictor n eec n ameet RESUS M T RT IF frequency eu LE 64 Output remote 134 lege tee 65 o a 64 aco 134 IF Power hale GT 75 Trigger level remote eeeeeeessee 144 IF VIDEO DEMOD el Du e e 65 Importing et RE UO data remote eu coii te adole dte AEA A adem e ded vet Input sir M Coupling Coupling remote UO data files Overload Overload remote ete td RR T E Settings con ge Signal parameters Source Configuration softkey ssss 48 Source Radio frequency RE 48 Input sarnple rate netter ecrit te R 72 Input sources VQ data UE 50 UO dat
35. 2100 os EE 96 Import Export Functions L Export Trace to ASCII File 2 tnnt tet t ttn n 96 L Trace Export Configurstioh actress tnl iate 96 G et AMNEM 96 Import Provides functions to import data Currently only UO data can be imported and only by applications that process UO data See the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer User Manual for more information UO Import Import Opens a file selection dialog box to select an import file that contains IQ data This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Note that the I Q data must have a specific format as described in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual Remote command MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe on page 200 Export Opens a submenu to configure data export Export Trace to ASCII File Export Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an
36. 25 GHz 264 0 MHz Span 2 64 GHz The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chap ter 9 10 4 11 Channel Frequency Response on page 198 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CFR see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 11 Channel Frequency Response on page 198 Constellation This result display shows the in phase and quadrature phase results for all payload symbols and all carriers for the analyzed PPDUS of the current capture buffer The Tracking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied The inphase results Il are displayed on the x axis the quadrature phase Q results on the y axis 2 Constellation pum PEL IN PERI CECI ANN US User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 20 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chapter 9 10 4 2 Constellation on page 195 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH CONS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 2 Constellation on page 195 EVM vs Symbol This result display shows all EVM values per symbol over the number of analyzed PPDUs as defined by the Evaluation Range settings see PPDU to Analyze Index of Specific PPDU on page 87 The Tracking Channel Estimation according to the user settings is applied see chapter 5 2 5 Tracking o
37. 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement PIG E a eire eere elt eie a cede aah yeaa Des tet ba aet ree rn aS 58 l sS LE 58 Si e MUT EE 58 Hatmonie Edel oe ore reta tnb cbe e cec ett e t P 58 EE 59 Mixer INGUIN EE 59 lk EE 59 DM I 59 xot VAG 2 ees deen Seege dees 59 Deal 60 Delete E EE 60 SM SPEI UT IU 60 leese Ee Eege 60 ENEE ee ee 60 File Name Defines the name under which the table is stored in the C r_s instr user cvl directory on the instrument The name of the table is identical with the name of the file without extension in which the table is stored This setting is mandatory The ACL extension is automatically appended during storage Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 Comment An optional comment that describes the conversion loss table The comment can be freely defined by the user Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent on page 125 Band The waveguide or user defined band for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 9 4 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BAND on page 123 Harmonic Order The harmonic order of the range for which the table is to be applied This setting is checked against the curr
38. Auto Scale Once Automatically determines the optimal range and reference level position to be dis played for the current measurement settings The display is only set once it is not adapted further if the measurement settings are changed again Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 165 5 3 SEM Measurements Absolute Scaling Min Max Values Define the scaling using absolute minimum and maximum values Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe MAXimum on page 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum On page 165 Relative Scaling Reference per Division Define the scaling relative to a reference value with a specified value range per divi sion Per Division Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the value range to be displayed per division of the diagram 1 10 of total range Note The value defined per division refers to the default display of 10 divisions on the y axis If fewer divisions are displayed e g because the window is reduced in height the range per division is increased in order to display the same result range in the smaller window In this case the per division value does not correspond to the actual display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision on page 166 Ref Position Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the position of the reference
39. E SENSe MIXerES enges np Eege Reeder SENS POWE SEM sontes aae AE ee o E Ov arai ISENS P OWE SEM CLAS Sirili EE Eed EES EES Du ceu SENSe SWAPiq SENSe SWEep COUNt SENSe ISWESp CGOUNECGCURROnE 2 etri ite eee Ec ee p Er OE Dn cecidi t rete eed Eu 182 SENSE I SWE6p MODE SENSe SWEep POINts se SENSE SWEGp UL ON SENSE see also SENSe commands essen enne nenne nennen nennen nnn 150 lol GALGulate sn BURSI IMMediate nr tero t oer er e eter trece ne rere eu ne ire vod CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt AOFF ek CALCulatesn DELETamarker smo LlNI iuuat ertt geed ed CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz LINK TOMAbkercmz anuria aaa e RERA 174 CAL CGulate nz D I TamarkerczmzMANimumlEET eene ener entere 179 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT wa BAe CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MA NimumRIGHt A CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimumf PEAK essent nnne nennen CALCulate n DELTamarker m MlINimum LEF T eae creciente a CAL Culate nz DEI Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT A CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt E CAL Culate nz D I Tamarker mz MiNmumf PEART nennen CAL Culatesn gt DEL Tamarkersim gt MRE Fives rrr ie rer tact ec E eot ie a EC occi ber ANA Reed CAL Culate nz D I Tam
40. ESP PRES command for new remote control programs Configuring SEM Measurements on IEEE 802 11ad Signals See the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands for SEM measurements chap ter Parameters lt 1 gt lt Filename gt Example string Path and name of the xm1 file that contains the SEM setup information MMEM LOAD SEM STAT 1 sem_std WLAN 802 11aN802 11a 10MHz 5GHz band XML SENSe POWer SEM lt Type gt This command sets the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement type Parameters lt Type gt Example IEEE ETSI User User Settings and limits are configured via a user defined XML file Load the file using MMEMory LOAD SEM STATe on page 153 IEEE Settings and limits are as specified in the IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission For other IEEE standards see the parameter values in the table below After a query IEEE is returned for all IEEE standards ETSI Settings and limits are as specified in the ETSI standard RST IEEE POW SEM ETSI Table 9 5 Supported IEEE standards Manual operation The spectrum emission mask measurement Parameter value is performed according to the standard IEEE 802 11n 2009 20M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 IEEE Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 or MHz transmission lEEE 2009 20 2 4 IEEE 802 11n 2009 IEEE S
41. Em 77 ED d i NITE RP DEREN 77 L Send NI Ge EMT 77 Trigger Source The trigger settings define the beginning of a measurement Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines the trigger source If a trigger source other than Free Run is set TRG is displayed in the channel bar and the trigger source is indicated Remote command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 Free Run Trigger Source Trigger Source No trigger source is considered Data acquisition is started manually or automatically and continues until stopped explicitely Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 External Trigger 1 2 3 Trigger Source Trigger Source Data acquisition starts when the TTL signal fed into the specified input connector meets or exceeds the specified trigger level See Trigger Level on page 75 Note The External Trigger 1 softkey automatically selects the trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector on the front panel For details see the Instrument Tour chapter in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External Trigger 1 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 1 INPUT connector External Trigger 2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 2 INPUT OUTPUT connector External Trigger 3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT TRIG SOUR EXT2 TRIG SOUR EXT3 See TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 I
42. FSW K82 BC2K CDMA2000 BTS cdma2000 MS R amp S FSW K83 MC2K CDMA2000 MS 1xEV DO BTS R amp S FSW K84 BDO 1xEV DO BTS 1xEV DO MS R amp S FSW K85 MDO 1xEV DO MS WLAN R amp S FSW K91 WLAN WLAN 802 11ad R amp S FSW K95 WIGIG 802 11ad LTE R amp S FSW K10x LTE LTE the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 111 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Real Time Spectrum R amp S FSW B160R RTIM Real Time Spectrum K160RE DOCSIS 3 1 R amp S FSW K192 193 DOCSis DOCSIS 3 1 the default channel name is also listed in the table If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel INSTrument REName lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command renames a measurement channel Parameters lt ChannelName1 gt String containing the name of the channel you want to rename lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the new channel name Note that you can not assign an existing channel name to a new channel this will cause an error Example INST REN IQAnalyzer2 IQAnalyzer3 Renames the channel with the name IQAnalyzer2 to IQAna lyzer3 Usage Setting on
43. MEAS key b In the Select Measurement dialog box select the required measurement The selected measurement is activated with the default settings for IEEE 802 11ad immediately 3 Select the Display Config button and select the evaluation methods that are of interest to you Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 4 Exit the SmartGrid mode and select the Overview softkey to display the Over view again 5 Select the Analysis button in the Overview to make use of the advanced analy sis functions in the result displays e Configure a trace to display the average over a series of sweeps if necessary increase the Sweep Count in the Sweep settings e Configure markers and delta markers to determine deviations and offsets within the evaluated signal How to Determine the SEM for IEEE 802 11ad Signals e Use special marker functions to calculate noise or a peak list e Configure a limit check to detect excessive deviations 6 Optionally export the trace data of the graphical evaluation results to a file a In the Traces tab of the Analysis dialog box switch to the Trace Export tab b Select Export Trace to ASCII File c Define a file name and storage location and select OK Common Suffixes 9 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements The following commands are required to perform measurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application in a remote environment It is assumed
44. Manual operation See Auto ID Threshold on page 55 Mixer Settings The following commands are required to configure the band and specific mixer set tings SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDYAONVSE ii cocus anes ceto cate eae erae eua eva Eau u SEENEN NEE EEN 119 SENSeJMIXerEREOuerCy S TARU iesen dg ee pete nea Ree ex cR n e de ean nes 119 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP2 aee CERS EES aieiaiee Pe PRU IUE DARET Edd BR 119 SENSe MIXeERHARMoOnIGBANDIPRESel 2 22 eet ener ert e bn cd 120 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALUE 0 00 0c0c0ecccccececneesececescnaectecdenanedecanensantteeserss 120 SENSe MlXer HARMONie HIGH STA Tensi a a Ea as 121 ISGENGe IMixer HAbRMontc HIGH MAL ue 121 ISENSe MISGEBARMODIET Y BE eher e ecce ere erae ebat Fen 121 SENSe MIXer HARMonic E OWg 2r eraot bee da SEENEN NEES ENEE 121 ISENSe MIXeELOSSMIGE EE 122 SENSe IMIXer EOSS T ABL BI GEL aue iniu door upe coe ete E NEEN to eater pedir Usage 122 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW cene tette tentes tts 122 SENSe MIXer LOSSBDLOW EE 122 SEN nbtHasng m 123 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATS acetate tao tati tee tta cett en e Ee teer inten entes 123 SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover Frequency This command defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency
45. Mixer sess 127 Basic Settings The basic settings concern general usage of an external mixer SENSE MIXE STAT c 117 SENSe MIXer BIAS MGH uuu pera ppet eec seg enebesigcacedathigedeceneiageccassugpecdstoasegedacaeaiwees 117 SENSe MIXer BIAS LLOW ecce tettte t tnte te tnttenttete ttt tnis 117 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement BENSE IMIX S Bee 117 SENSE MIXet SIGNA m E 118 SENSe MIXer THReshiold accrue ne ipn tan eanan niana aaa ai iiad ia 118 SENSe MIXer STATe lt State gt Activates or deactivates the use of a connected external mixer as input for the mea surement This command is only available if the optional External Mixer is installed and an external mixer is connected Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX ON Manual operation See External Mixer State on page 51 SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the high second range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 117 Parameters lt BiasSetting gt RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 55 SENSe MIXer BIAS LOW lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias current for the low first range This command is only available if the external mixer is active se
46. PE TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling eese enne nnne e ee EE ene RE e E TRIGge r SEQuence SOURCe 2 irt rete ere E e ere poen a e a ei ere Ee ER E ERE does TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval eese nennen nennen ener nennen enne nne WNITZAN GL e S Index Symbols ro 32 Programming examples rr nini 207 A Aborting SWEEP EE 79 80 eier ele Te EE 49 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements remote 109 Alignment P weenie oem 62 Amplitude E el ue ULT Configuration remote iur M Q Analysis Remote control re mer metis 172 RF measurements iter ener 87 e M 87 Applications Adopted parameters siiicar 45 Switching Attenuation ve e EE 70 Electronic Manual zd OPTION e M 70 PrOteCtIVE p 36 Protective remote tct 115 Audio signals Output remote certes 64 134 Auto ID External Met geck iet ern re eene 55 External Mixer Remote control 118 Threshold External Mixer remote control Ass Threshold External Mixer AAA 55 Auto level Reference level 69 79 SOKE ideo ten teet ab v dee td 69 79 Auto SCALING EE 83 Auto settings re REMOtE Control rrr rre no rts 153 e D 80 B B2000 Activating Deactivating A 60 AAMEN T
47. Phase Tracking vs Symbol PFALIing PvT Falling Edge PFPPdu PvT Full PPDU Configuring the Result Display Parameter value Window type PRISing PvT Rising Edge PSPectrum Power Spectrum RSGLobal Result Summary Window types for RF data DIAGram Diagram MTABle Marker table PEAKIist Marker peak list RSUMmary Result summary LAYout CATalog WINDow This command queries the name and index of all active windows in the active mea surement channel from top left to bottom right The result is a comma separated list of values for each window with the syntax lt WindowName_1 gt lt Windowlndex_1 gt lt WindowName_n gt lt Windowlndex_n gt Return values lt WindowName gt string Name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Windowlndex numeric value Index of the window Example LAY CAT Result KN EM Two windows are displayed named 2 at the top or left and 1 at the bottom or right Usage Query only LAYout IDENtify WINDow lt WindowName gt This command queries the index of a particular display window in the active measure ment channel Note to query the name of a particular window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify query Query parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window Return values Windowlndex Index number of the window Configuring the Result Display Example LA
48. QUADerrmorMI NIB uec ta asocio enean cmo ueni Re daten e ab epe gar taal 189 edad wv izrcp C M 189 PET CHART IMG Mr KE 189 FETGHART Me MINIMUM orisi pairina etas haue re Pn pnto EE See urea pee pa ae endis 189 FETCh SYMBolemorAVERAde udi et zx dz e rete eter eoe tege a o dang aaia 190 FETCh S YMBolenrorivA ME 1 2 2 pa edes Saves bods Pede od teca te tread 190 FETCOh SYMBolerror MINI 3 root ce eo iot ee ero aano t Adee en nente AEN 190 al ler ale e trt ette eg ee ord eoa eb seed aus Tere 190 FETChETDPOWerpMPBAXIINUI T renean otra a reed Peto ss eese Peer ids ave Roo RR 190 FETChETDPOWeEMINIIIUEI icone adn nee tot ro nuo nre Eyre CO na vo IMp DER eR seesvadae sseaudcasaccwer 190 Retrieving Results FETCH TOSKEN AVERAGE T uccidere d teat ddl ee e eaae diae date de x 190 FETGIETSKew MAXIIIUF I uicina c aa conu eo eet SENNENG Se 190 FETGHTSKEWIMINIIG uci stevens bast away aca pea tt tec a a du dd Eger a oa oe ru chus aui rend 190 FETCh BURSt ALL This command returns all results from the default IEEE 802 11ad UO measurement see Result Summary on page 27 For details on individual parameters see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parame ters on page 13 The results are output as a list of result strings separated by commas in ASCII format The results are output in the following order Return values Result min EVM All avg EVM All max EVM All min EVM Da
49. Ra PEE ER ED keene esate vacuas 190 FORMat BSTReam FORMaEtbBDEXPort DSEParf alol trip Hee egt ccce PH cn epu be eed dp ge nae 202 FORMaEDEXPO t GRAPE iecore te rer aereo a erred bcr dae Mr eee a a e e recedere dea EAEE 202 FORMat DEXPOM HEAD 68 202 FORMatDEXPort TRA CCS iis a tret eret tee er ver vete e eue XV oy de Er EVE RR ER RR ES A TUER RE ERE Res 202 FORMAatl qp 192 INimates n gt CONTINUOUS oc es 169 INITiatesn gt SEQUENCEPABORE EE 170 INI Tiatesnz SEQuencer IMMedi al E 170 ll NEE Ee le RE 170 ll ME BT 169 Jl Tei RE TEE 138 deM RENE TE TiO pte 139 INPut ATTenuation Ge Ee dee rrt tentent che acier spectet ud 115 ll Dee ll E 115 DIN PRUETT p 139 INPGTEAT TAU TO ve tesscenrevesn HM 139 INPut EAT T S TATG iicet ire orc rcr hr recur adits tea i cer eve A uoce vr e Per dre rx ra Yee 140 INPut FILE PATH m siue PME 141 INPO GAINEVALUS EE MH 140 lee 115 INSTrument er EI RUE TEE 109 ENT lee EI TE EE 110 INS Trument CREate NEWI e 109 INSTru merntDE l le nocent rnt rer trn cn sued it een etn nn e tpa ge PE ERE IEEE Reagan 110 INS TRUMONt Bl S
50. Result Display eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneennn nnne nnn nnne nnne 155 9 8 Starting a Measurement 4 seeeeesssesseeeeeeeen enean nn nnn n nankon nerien natn neni na 167 EMEN LI epe 172 9 10 Retrieving Results EE HERR PETERE Irene 184 9 11 Status TE teer exer pe aane r ell Te ere a REFER aeaa ni AEE EEEN DERE 203 9 12 Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 207 END RR m T 211 Ail RefQreNnCe ER 211 A 2 NVQ Data File Format iq tar cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseceeseeeeeeseseeeesneeeeeeeeeeessenensenees 211 List of Remote Commands 802 11adQ 217 i Mee 223 About this Manual 1 Preface 1 1 About this Manual This R amp S FSW 802 11ad application User Manual provides all the information specific to the application All general instrument functions and settings common to all appli cations and operating modes are described in the main R amp S FSW User Manual The main focus in this manual is on the measurement results and the tasks required to obtain them The following topics are included chapter 2 Welcome to the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application on page 9 Introduction to and getting familiar with the application chapter 3 Measurements and Result Displays on page 13 Details on supported measu
51. Symbol Count Resuhts nnns 185 Error Parameter eelere EES Ae eege 186 PPDU and Symbol Count Results The following commands are required to retrieve PPDU and symbol count results from the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement on the captured UO data see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 a He RE ee EE 185 FETCIHB RSELENGIIS E 185 FETGIB RSEUSTARIST tenter nt trt bn ter kh xe REC ERR EFIE eR REX nen AEESENAAEE 185 FETCh BURSt COUNt This command returns the number of analyzed PPDUs from the current capture buffer Return values lt PPDUs gt integer Usage Query only FETCh BURSt LENGths This command returns the EVM symbol count of the analyzed PPDUs from the current measurement The result is a comma separated list of symbol counts one for each PPDU Return values lt PPDULength gt integer value number of symbols as counted for the EVM calculation Usage Query only FETCh BURSt STARts This command returns the start position of each analyzed PPDU in the current capture buffer 9 10 1 2 Retrieving Results Return values lt Position gt Comma separated list of samples indicating the start position of each PPDU Usage Query only Error Parameter Results The following commands are required to retrieve individual results from the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement on the captured UO data se
52. a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify This command queries the name of a particular display window indicated by the lt n gt suffix in the active measurement channel Note to query the index of a particular window use the LAYout IDENtify WINDow command Return values lt WindowName gt String containing the name of a window In the default state the name of the window is its index 9 7 3 9 7 4 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY WIND2 IDEN Queries the name of the result display in window 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout WINDow n REMove This command removes the window specified by the suffix n from the display in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REMove WINDow command Example LAY WIND2 REM Removes the result display in window 2 Usage Event LAY out WINDow lt n gt REPLace lt WindowType gt This command changes the window type of an existing window specified by the suffix lt n gt in the active measurement channel The result of this command is identical to the LAYout REPLace WINDow com mand To add a new window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt ADD command Parameters lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to replace another one with See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 for a list of
53. and each additional firmware application The user manuals are available in PDF format in printable form on the Documenta tion DVD delivered with the instrument In the user manuals all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore they provide a complete description of the remote control commands with programming examples The user manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSW in general and the Spectrum application in particular Furthermore the soft ware functions that enhance the basic functionality for various applications are descri bed here An introduction to remote control is provided as well as information on main tenance instrument interfaces and troubleshooting In the individual application manuals the specific instrument functions of the applica tion are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parame ters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSW is not inclu ded in the application manuals 1 3 1 3 1 Conventions Used in the Documentation All user manuals are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the Documentation DVD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument functio
54. and measurement settings 2 Window title bar with diagram specific trace information 3 Diagram area with marker information 4 Diagram footer with diagram specific information depending on result display 5 Instrument status bar with error messages progress bar and date time display Channel bar information In the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application the R amp S FSW shows the following settings Table 2 1 Information displayed in the channel bar in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application Label Description Ref Level Reference level Att Mechanical and electronic RF attenuation MCS Index The MCS Index used for the analysis of the signal Depending on the demodulation settings this value is either detected automatically from the signal or the user settings are applied Freq Center frequency for the RF signal Meas time Samples Duration of signal capture and number of samples captured No of Data Symbols The minimum and maximum number of data symbols that a PPDU may have if it is to be considered in results analysis User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 11 Understanding the Display Information Label Description SGL The sweep is set to single sweep mode PPDUs Number of analyzed PPDUs for statistical evaluation In addition the channel bar also displays information on instrument settings that affect the measurement results even though this is not immediately apparent from the displa
55. availa ble window types Example LAY WIND2 REPL MTAB Replaces the result display in window 2 with a marker table Selecting Items to Display in Result Summary The following command defines which items are displayed in the Result Summary Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Units The scaling for the vertical axis is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These commands are described here Useful commands for configuring scaling described elsewhere DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 138 Configuring the Result Display Remote commands exclusive to scaling the y axis CAL Culatesm gt s UNIT ANGLE otto preneur bebe etd tau epe tere xe cea egestate setae 164 Bgni eE M 164 GALCulatesns UNIT EREQUGFG zit eco eu ru tuno ru eoe ep eeu oh aX RE Ru ENE RT 164 CAL Culate lt n gt UNIT POWE cccececeeeeeee eee ee cece eae ae eae ae aaa aaa faaarii iei sisse sns adai ana 164 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects NI SCALelUNIT enne 165 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectslSCALelAUlTO nennen nnns 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAX IMUM eene 165 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe MINimum eeeeeeeeee nennen 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIV S ON eene 166 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RPOSition seen 166 DISPlay WINDow n T
56. be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 65 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 58 SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer Type This command defines the mixer name in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Type string Name of mixer with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX FS Z60 Manual operation See Mixer Name on page 59 SENSe CORRection CVL PORTs lt PortNo gt This command defines the mixer type in the conversion loss table This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command i
57. data If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key Select the FJ Open icon in the toolbar Select the UO Import softkey Select the storage location and the file name with the iq tar file extension o oco B Y Ww Select Open The stored data is loaded from the file and displayed in the current application Previewing the I Q data in a web browser The iq tar file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser 1 Use an archive tool e g WinZip amp or PowerArchiver amp to unpack the iq tar file into a folder 2 Locate the folder using Windows Explorer 3 Open your web browser gt xzy xml How to Export and Import UO Data 4 Drag the UO parameter XML file e g example xml into your web browser al gt Hei ay xml e D x xzy xml xzy xml of iq tar file Saved by FSV IQ Analyzer Comment Here is a comment Date amp Time 2011 03 03 14 33 05 Sample rate 6 5 MHz Number of samples 65000 Duration of signal 10 ms Data format complex float32 Data filename xzy complex 1ch float32 Scaling factor 1v Comment Channel 1 of 1 Power vs time y axis 10 dB div x axis 1 ms div Spectrum y axis 20 dB div x axis 500 kHz div E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http Avww rohde s
58. effect on the instrument s hardware or on the captured data or on data processing It is simply a manipulation of the final results in which absolute fre quency values are displayed Thus the x axis of a spectrum display is shifted by a constant offset if it shows absolute frequencies but not if it shows frequencies relative to the signal s center frequency IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement A frequency offset can be used to correct the display of a signal that is slightly distorted by the measurement setup for example The allowed values range from 100 GHz to 100 GHz The default setting is 0 Hz Remote command SENSe FREQuency OFFSet on page 136 5 2 2 4 Amplitude Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Amplitude or AMPT gt Amplitude Config Amplitude settings determine how the R amp S FSW must process or display the expected input power levels Spectrum WiGig Input Source Frequency Amplitude Output B2000 Re ve Input Settings Value 0 0 dBm Preampifier o O S Offset 0 0 dB Unit Auto Level Attenuation Electronic Attenuation State Mode Mode Value Value In the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application the impedance is fixed to 50 O and cannot be changed EE m 68 L Shifting the Display Offset 69 ei PEN Kc 69 L Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 69 FR ASIA o e
59. for level drifts within a single PPDU If acti vated the measurement results are compensated for level error on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe TRACking LEVel on page 149 UO Mismatch Compensation Activates or deactivates the compensation for UO mismatch If activated the measurement results are compensated for gain imbalance and quadra ture offset Remote command SENSe TRACking IQMComp on page 149 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 5 2 6 Automatic Settings Access AUTO SET Some settings can be adjusted by the R amp S FSW automatically according to the current measurement settings and signal characteristics Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level 79 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way Remote command
60. from 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm in 0 1 dB steps Default value is 15 5 dB Remote command SENSe MIXer LOPower on page 117 Signal ID Activates or deactivates visual signal identification Two sweeps are performed alter nately Trace 1 shows the trace measured on the upper side band USB of the LO the test sweep trace 2 shows the trace measured on the lower side band LSB i e the reference sweep Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in the VSA the UO Analyzer or the Real Time application for instance Mathematical functions with traces and trace copy cannot be used with the Signal ID function Remote command SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 118 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Auto ID Activates or deactivates automatic signal identification Auto ID basically functions like Signal ID However the test and reference sweeps are converted into a single trace by a comparison of maximum peak values of each sweep point The result of this comparison is displayed in trace 3 if Signal ID is active at the same time If Signal ID is not active the result can be displayed in any of the traces 1 to 3 Unwanted mixer products are suppressed in this calculated trace Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance
61. in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for the connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 147 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection on page 147 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 147 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 147 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger cport PULSe LENGth
62. it receives regardless of the format Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCii format separated by commas This format is almost always suitable regardless of the actual data format However the data is not as compact as other for mats may be REAL 32 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point numbers in the definite length block format In the Spectrum application the format setting REAL is used for the binary transmission of trace data For UO data 8 bytes per sample are returned for this format set ting RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 Usage SCPI confirmed TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command queries current trace data and measurement results from the specified window For details see chapter 9 10 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 195 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt ResultType gt Return values lt TraceData gt Example Usage Manual operation Retrieving Results Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE TRACE6 Returns the trace data for the corresponding trace Note that for the default IEEE 802 11ad UO measurement Mod ulation Accuracy Flatness and Tolerance only 1 trace per win dow TRACE is available LIST Returns the results of the peak list evaluation for Spectrum Emission Mask measurements For more information see tables below DISP WIND2 SEL TRAC TRACE3 Queries the data of trace 3 i
63. ne op nes Ta Prag TCR aee RR npe TE anaE 112 INS Trento SEDel EE 112 SYSTem E e NEE e TL EE 113 INSTrument CREate DUPLicate This command duplicates the currently selected measurement channel i e creates a new measurement channel of the same type and with the identical measurement set tings The name of the new channel is the same as the copied channel extended by a consecutive number e g IQAnalyzer gt IQAnalyzer2 The channel to be duplicated must be selected first using the INST SEL command Example INST SEL IQAnalyzer INST CRE DUPL Duplicates the channel named IQAnalyzer and creates a new measurement channel named IQAnalyzer2 Usage Event INSTrument CREate NEW lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command adds an additional measurement channel The number of measurement channels you can configure at the same time depends on available memory Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 110 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The channel name is displayed as the tab label for the measurement channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 110 Example INST CRE IQ IQAnalyzer2 Adds an ad
64. on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh CFERror AVERage FETCh CFERror MAXimum FETCh CFERror MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum center frequency error for the PPDU in Hz For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh EVM ALL AVERage FETCh EVM ALL MAXimum FETCh EVM ALL MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM for all symbols for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh EVM DATA AVERage FETCh EVM DATA MAXimum FETCh EVM DATA MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM for data symbols for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh EVM PILot AVERage FETCh EVM PILot MAXimum FETCh EVM PILot MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum EVM for pilot symbols for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only Retrieving Results FETCh FTIMe AVERage FETCh FTIMe MAXimum FETCh FTIMe MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum fall time for the PPDU in s For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh GIMBalance AVERage FETCh GIMBalance MAXimum FETCh GIMBalance MINimum Th
65. on page 148 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is sent Which pulse level will be sent is indicated by a graphic on the button Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate on page 148 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 5 2 5 Tracking Access Overview gt Tracking or MEAS CONFIG gt Tracking Tracking settings allow for compensation of some transmission effects in the signal see Phase level and timing tracking on page 34 Phase Level IQ Mismatch Compensation a Off Phase TACKI E 78 Level Error Gain Tracking tete e Pd eite ie 78 I O Mismatch Compensation cerent nett tente t e a then EH ke ra Ru ask nantes 78 Phase Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are compensated for phase drifts based on data symbol blocks 2512 symbols Tip the phase drifts which will be used for compensation are displayed in the Phase Tracking vs Symbol result display Remote command SENSe TRACking PHASe on page 149 Level Error Gain Tracking Activates or deactivates the compensation
66. pace n Enea d zu ga Nera VPE ETE YER 174 GAL Culatesnz MARKGESITIS Kei cuui superet uim p incra are bp eee orsi Roane exeunt PESENE pe Une E GAES EDET EEEE 191 CAL GCulatesns MARKeOr tmIo Y Kunsa naie pk ce Gon od du eae d vd du e P T Cd pud 199 GALGulatesn MARKersm STATe6 ein cocher rh nene re ek trn nri rrr inae 173 CALCulate n UNIT ANGLe 164 GALGulatesn UNIT FREQUENCY oseni kr tn ren re rr tl e ex EE RESP 164 CAL Gulatesne UNIT POWE em EC CONFIGUrE POW EAU TO E DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce DISPlay dejtoeee E 156 DISPlay MTAB cnt aA re En EX Ee X epp a xr ae S TY ke d EN E n pa 176 RUE EVER E RE rr entr ener nte hah rt ter terr e t er SFR a EXE Natai 156 DBISPlay WINDowsn 7 TRAGeSEt MODE coto etre hne RE rait e tH tuos EE cree EE EE 180 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t X SCALe UNIT sess nere trennen 165 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe AUTO essen enne 165 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe st Y SCALe MAXimum eese nnne 165 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision DISPlay WINDowsn TRACest Y SCALe RLEWVel nutrit ttt DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCAL6 RLEVelQFF Gel 138 DISPlay WINDow n TRACec t Y SCALe RPOSition esssssseseeee
67. parts Documentation Overview e Printed Getting Started manual e Online Help system on the instrument e Documentation DVD with Getting Started User Manuals for base unit and firmware applications Service Manual Release Notes Data sheet and product brochures Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive access to the complete information needed for operation and programming Online help is available using the icon on the toolbar of the R amp S FSW Web Help The web help provides online access to the complete information on operating the R amp S FSW and all available options without downloading The content of the web help corresponds to the user manuals for the latest product version The web help is availa ble from the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html Downloads Web Help Getting Started This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the DVD It provides the information needed to set up and start working with the instru ment Basic operations and handling are described Safety information is also included The Getting Started manual in various languages is also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW html User Manuals User manuals are provided for the base unit
68. performed successfully Example SYST COMM RDEV O0SC ALIG STEP Result 1 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE Returns the date of alignment of the IF OUT 2 GHZ to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values lt Date gt Returns the date of alignment Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC DATE Result 2014 02 28 Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN Returns the identification string of the oscilloscope connected to the R amp S FSW Return values lt IDString gt Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Example SYST COMM RDEV OSC IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 2 45 1 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See TCPIP Address or Computer name on page 61 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState Returns the state of the LAN connection to the oscilloscope for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Return values Color GREEN Connection to the instrument has been established successfully GREY Configuration state unknown for example if you have not yet started transmission RED Connection to the instrument could not be established Check the connection between the R amp S FSW and the oscillo Scope and make sure the IP address of the oscilloscope has been defined see SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice
69. port gt PULSe IMMediate OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth SENSe TRACKking IQMGomp xiit ot ttr nr tenen kr rre per ere REENERT ENEE SENSE TRACKING HE DENSE HRA CK IG PHASE rererere rE ee r E A SENSE TRACKing TIME eccentric e rece Und ERR t Ha Pe c RE Ee d a STATuUSs OPERation CONDINON ee eei eco err iet e LEM Edge EE 205 GEMET enk Gr LTE 206 STATus OPERatiori NTRARSIHOR coco trt tree e dern n n e YR renun de e rey Ev eere ene Reyna peu 206 STAT s OPERation PTRaisIitlOn ion coo iater tht hene ce re kk tarte ether tna Erro ELE TSS 206 EMU Tee KREE 205 S TATUS PRESOL tci eee tp ae C egt tte sa ded ee e ge Us RE te Ed TAE d STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATUS QUEStiOmabIeENABIG reomp E ie aA E E E E E TEETER STATus QUEStionable NTRahsillofi cetero terere a a tr nete re reto STATus QUEStionable P I RariSitiOn cioe eerte rero tb eee ene reponi ae ri ae does STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDiition esses eene nnne nennen nennen nnns nnne 205 STATUus QUEStionable SYNG ENABIO 9 eite t ette ace e vet ppt ue tae dane lat ee ve ea d 206 STATus QUEStionable S YNC NTRarIiSItiOn rcr ehe ertet tk rero ERO 206 HE AT elle EE de an E e D 206 STATus QUEStionable SYNG EVENIE ctr iret vr ctp rtt Pv 205 STAT s QUEStionabler EVENIT cen reti Pre c epe rt E ere ria n E Pre EO D E Rer 205 SPAY TNS GUE Ue NE i 205 SYSTem C
70. rable FRE VOTING TEE S 52 Ee o Em 52 MIXGE Ke 52 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration 1 1 2 2 eicit oro i edited 52 EE 52 Kee NEM 53 L Harmonic DOO eet tpe it tito epp itta ctt itn Fais atas dept did 53 Keeler 53 External Mixer State Activates or deactivates the external mixer for input If activated ExtMix is indicated in the channel bar of the application together with the used band see Band on page 52 Remote command SENSe MIXer STATe on page 117 RF Start RF Stop Displays the start and stop frequency of the selected band read only The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configura tion see Range 1 2 on page 52 For details on available frequency ranges see table 9 4 Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt on page 119 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP on page 119 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Handover Freq Defines the frequency at which the mixer switches from one range to the next if two different ranges are selected The handover frequency can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range Remote command SENSe MIXer FREQuency HANDover on page 119 Band Defines the waveguide band or user defined band to be used by the mixer The start and stop frequencies of the selected band are displayed in the RF Start and RF Stop fields For a definition of the frequency range for th
71. search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher minimum value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the minimum level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event 9 9 2 Configuring Standard Traces DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cceceeeeeee eee ee eee tr eee nere eh enne en nen en nnns 180 DISPlayWINDowe amp rn TRAGCestP STATe 2 ierit ten 181 SENSe SWEep POINIS 2 deerat aai vat eder sare ea Ra eoe epa dv ENEE Ee 182 SENSe JAVERags She COUNT E 182 SENSe SWEep COUNL ect tenerent tet ttes t test con 182 SENSe SWEep COUNEGECUFERenl 2 cerotacd ruso cct asco crat aeo co a cec aede eu adu e 182 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE Mode This command selects the trace mode In case of max hold min hold or average trace mode you can set the number of single measurements with SENSe SWEep COUNt Note that synchronization to the end of the measurement is possible only in sing
72. the current marker values for the active markers 4 Marker Table X value 13 25 GHz 600 0 kHz 600 0 kHz 2 0 MHz Tip To navigate within long marker tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MTAB see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 199 Marker Peak List The marker peak list determines the frequencies and levels of peaks in the spectrum or time domain How many peaks are displayed can be defined as well as the sort order In addition the detected peaks can be indicated in the diagram The peak list can also be exported to a file for analysis in an external application SSS Ee NN UU S User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 30 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays 2 Marker Peak List No l Tip To navigate within long marker peak lists simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEAK see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 199 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 31 R amp S FSW K95 Measurement Basics 4 Measurement Basics Some background knowledge on basic terms and principles used in IEEE 802 11ad measurements is provided here for a better understanding
73. their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quota tion marks Conventions Used in the Documentation 1 3 2 Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instrument or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard operating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a key board 1 3 3 Notes on Screenshots When describing the functions of the product we use sample screenshots These screenshots are meant to illustrate as much as possible of the provided functions and possible interdependencies between parameters The screenshots usually show a fully equipped product that is with all options instal led Thus some functions shown in the screenshots may not be available in your par ticular product configuration 2 Welcome to the R amp S FSW 802 11ad appli cation The R amp
74. to select a common RF measurement for IEEE 802 11ad signals in a remote environment For details on available measurements see chapter 3 2 SEM Measurements on page 28 ENSeTSWwWEepMODE ttt tentent ttt te tette tentes 114 SENSe SWEep MODE Mode Selects the measurement to be performed Parameters Mode AUTO ESPectrum AUTO Standard IEEE 802 11ad UO measurement ESPectrum Spectrum emission mask measurement RST AUTO Example SENS SWE MODE ESP 9 5 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement The following commands are required to configure the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement described in chapter 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accu racy Measurement on page 13 e Configuring the Data Input and Output 114 e Erontend Contigurauon E 135 e Ee let D Le DEE 141 TORN DE 149 CM EE ei Ne te EE 150 e Automatic Settings dete tene Hen eee eo REPE HE E RE Rc ans 153 9 5 1 Configuring the Data Input and Output M aT c AE A E sue 115 mnputtom VQ Data Eas eoe ee teer reri rente een te ER ER Reines 116 e Using External MIXOIS or rere aa ARE Ger Te Pea be S E EARE 116 e Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 129 e Configuring the OUIUIES i neret terrre aside dist rede errato rbd neon 133 9 5 1 1 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement RF Input INPut ATTenuation PROTection REGet
75. use of such files are described here For details see chapter 4 3 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 37 Useful commands for retrieving results described elsewhere INPut SELect on page 115 Remote commands exclusive to input from UO data files INPUCRIEE Vp em UT 116 INPut FILE PATH lt FileName gt This command selects the I Q data file to be used as input for further measurements The UO data must have a specific format as described in chapter A 2 I O Data File Format iq tar on page 211 For details see chapter 4 3 2 Basics on Input from UO Data Files on page 37 Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file The file extension is iq tar Example INP FILE PATH C R_S Instr user data iq tar Uses UO data from the specified file as input Usage Setting only Manual operation See Select Q Data File on page 50 Using External Mixers The commands required to work with external mixers in a remote environment are described here Note that these commands require the R amp S FSW B21 option to be installed and an external mixer to be connected to the front panel of the R amp S FSW For details on working with external mixers see the R amp S FSW User Manual c r unpr Y 116 Eu e EE 118 Conversion Loss Table S6t ligs et eR RP EES 123 e Programming Example Working with an External
76. value in percent of the total y axis range Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 166 Ref Value Relative Scaling Reference per Division Defines the reference value to be displayed at the specified reference position Remote command DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue on page 166 SEM Measurements Access Overview gt Select Measurement or MEAS gt Select Measurement When you activate a measurement channel in IEEE 802 11ad mode an IQ measure ment of the input signal is started automatically see chapter 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Mod ulation Accuracy Measurement on page 13 However some parameters specified in the IEEE 802 11ad standard require a better signal to noise level or a smaller band width filter than the default measurement on UO data provides and must be determined in separate measurements based on RF data see chapter 3 2 SEM Measurements on page 28 In these measurements demodulation is not performed The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base sys tem Spectrum application to perform the IEEE 802 11ad SEM measurements Some parameters are set automatically according to the IEEE 802 11ad standard the first SEM Measurements time a measurement is selected since the last PRESET operation These parameters can be changed but are not reset automatically the next time you re enter the mea suremen
77. which harmonic to use and how the Conversion loss is handled Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe on page 121 Harmonic Type Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines if only even only odd or even and odd harmonics can be used for conversion Depending on this selection the order of harmonic to be used for conversion changes see Harmonic Order on page 53 Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE on page 121 Harmonic Order Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines which order of the harmonic of the LO frequencies is used to cover the fre quency range By default the lowest order of the specified harmonic type is selected that allows con version of input signals in the whole band If due to the LO frequency the conversion is not possible using one harmonic the band is split For the band USER the order of harmonic is defined by the user The order of har monic can be between 2 and 61 the lowest usable frequency being 26 5 GHz Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW on page 121 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue on page 121 Conversion loss Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Defines how the conversion loss is handled The following methods are available Average Defines the average conversion loss for the entire range in dB Table Defines the conversion loss via the table selected from the list P
78. xml stylesheet type text xsl href open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt RS IQ TAR FileFormat fileFormatVersion 1 xsi noNamespaceSchemaLocation RsIqTar xsd xmlns xsi http www w3 org 2001 XMLSchema instance lt Name gt FSV K10 lt Name gt lt Comment gt Here is a comment lt Comment gt lt DateTime gt 2011 01 24T14 02 49 lt DateTime gt lt Samples gt 68751 lt Samples gt lt Clock unit Hz gt 6 5e 006 lt Clock gt lt Format gt complex lt Format gt lt DataType gt float32 lt DataType gt lt ScalingFactor unit V gt 1 lt ScalingFactor gt lt NumberOfChannels gt 1 lt NumberOfChannels gt DataFilename xyz complex float32 DataFilename lt UserData gt lt UserDefinedElement gt Example lt UserDefinedElement gt lt UserData gt lt PreviewData gt lt PreviewData gt lt RS_IQ TAR FileFormat gt Element Description RS IQ TAR File The root element of the XML file It must contain the attribute ileFormatVersion Format that contains the number of the file format definition Currently fileFormatVersion 2 is used Name Optional describes the device or application that created the file Comment Optional contains text that further describes the contents of the file DateTime Contains the date and time of the creation of the file Its type is xs dateTime see RsIqTar xsd Q Data File Format iq tar Element Samples Description Contains the
79. 172 State see s 92 Table ccce ttes 94 Table evaluation method 30 Ke ER Maximizing Windows remote rt e ori tree Sens 156 Measurement channel Creating remote sesesssss 109 110 112 Deleting remote AAA 110 Duplicating remote AA 109 Querying remote 2 encres nitent 110 Renaming remote cesessseeecesereeeeteeeeeeaeeeeeeaes 112 Replacing remote ittis tette 110 Selecting remote riisiin 112 Measurement time Ine 142 Measurements Selecting torret ere 47 Selecting remote zu TIS SEM p 28 Starting remote asa 167 WY POS c 13 Mixer Type External MIxet eei rrt 52 Modulation Inverted UO remote Inverted I G EE Modulation Accuracy Parameters 9 b egg PE RR EE erect Programming example Multiple Measurement channels AA 10 N Noise irem 38 65 O Offset Amplification l Q merde Sever tivated ead EE ces dedisse Eesen audis uice ape CES Phase angle I Q no ell EE 16 Reference level inicr erat sede e ges 69 Options Electronic attenuation 2 iir a 70 PreampliflGr erret trice docete 49 71 Oscilloscope ACGOICSS 3 e S 61 Oscilloscopes alle lu 62 Connections B2000 sse 62 Remote commands B2000 sss 129 Output Te Te uiis ene v n e ut IR ad 134 elle ULT E Configuration remote E IF frequency rem
80. 81 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Markers Marker Settings Units Y Scaling Phase Units Bit Stream Format Phase Uiii SETTE EOD TOEIC REIS 82 Steel e EE 82 Phase Unit Defines the unit in which phases are displayed degree or rad Remote command UNIT ANGLe on page 164 Bitstream Format Switches the format of the bitstream between octet and hexadecimal values Remote command FORMat BSTReam on page 167 5 2 8 3 Y Scaling Access Overview Result Config Y Scaling or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config gt Y Scaling The scaling for the vertical axis in most graphical displays is highly configurable using either absolute or relative values These settings are described here IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Markers Marker Settings Marker Search Units Y Scaling Automatic grid scaling Auto On Auto Scale Once Ref 10 0 dBm AT enee Ee e EE 83 Auto Scale ONCE aninion again oit een Coe nre eaa pea d ER eas gate MEER deca 83 Absolute Scaling Min Max Vales cocido oett lot eed ee eir tre cert ce tn 84 Relative Scaling Reference per Division 84 uu 1 MER RITE 84 Bl iss m C E E E M 84 L i 5 e a 84 Automatic Grid Scaling The y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement settings and results Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO on page 165
81. 87 6 1 Evaluation Rango cocer Entities tee thua inae NEENA Een ERR EES EEEER SEKR 87 6 2 Trace Configuration 5 necne nante hast en kk na n tn ku adus e kk uuu ona ERR uu Enni 88 rc m 90 7 VQ Data Import and EXDOEE enr epxstE dEr 95 7 1 Import Export Functions leeeeeseesseeseeseseeeeeenennnenn nennen nn nnn nette En 95 7 2 Howto Export and Import UO Data eseessesseeeeeeseeseeeeeeenen ennt nnn 97 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 3 8 How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad applica TH ea ics 100 8 1 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for IEEE 802 11ad Signals ETE 100 8 2 How to Determine the SEM for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 101 9 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements 103 9 1 Common S ffixes eee iie ertt snes e REPE EEA SEENEN 103 9 2 Introd ction z seti eene BRE ee tenis MD 104 9 3 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements eeeeeeen n 109 9 4 Selecting a Measurement useseeessseeeeeeenn ennt nennen nnn nnn nnn nennt nnn 113 9 5 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 114 9 6 Configuring SEM Measurements on IEEE 802 11ad Signals 153 9 7 Configuring the
82. ALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LOEXclude lt State gt This command turns the suppression of the local oscillator during automatic marker positioning on and off for a markers in all windows lt m gt n are irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example CALC MARK LOEX ON CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion lt Excursion gt This command defines the peak excursion for all markers in all windows m n are irrelevant The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the measurement Positioning the Marker This chapter contains remote commands necessary to position the marker on a trace e Positioning Normal MarKGEs caa cuc cerent net coe then EE 177 e Positioning Delta Markers ricana aan e ESPERE e PER EX tlie 179 Positioning Normal Markers The following commands position markers on the trace CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXiMUM LEET 177 CAL Culate nz M AbkercmzMAximumNENT a aai roi 178 CAL Culate nzM Abkercm M AXimumf PDEAK 178 CAL Culate nz M Abker mzM AimumbRlGHt 178 CAL Culate lt n gt MARKersm gt iMININUM LEFT sc2220002sscedecerssascascsscacedceraercadeddeasouneccnveageadedes 178 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz MiNimumNENT 178 CALOCulate n MARKer m MlNimum PEAK cecinere nena 178 CAL Culate nz M Abker mmz MiNimum RI 179
83. B Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 141 INPut GAIN VALue on page 140 Settings for Input from UO Data Files Access Overview Input Frontend Input Source IQ file or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt IQ file Input Source ME o Frequency Input File Digital IQ C R_S Instr user predefined D_Waveform iq tar Select File Saved by FSW K Comment Date amp time 2015 02 1871 11 16 53 Sample rate 204 8 MHz Number of samples 1228800 Duration of signal 6ms Number of channels 1 1Q File IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement For details see chapter 4 3 2 Basics on Input from I Q Data Files on page 37 oO Vist FIG SE a i oe eret ode ad redii te eterni era ecu data inea dc dea 50 select VQ Data File E 50 UO Input File State Activates input from the selected UO input file If enabled the application performs measurements on the data from this file Thus most measurement settings related to data acquisition attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate cannot be changed The measurement time can only be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the availa ble data only Note Even when the file input is deactivated the input file remains selected and can be activated again quickly by changing the state Remote command INPut SELect on page 115 Select I Q Data File Opens a file selection
84. EEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement IF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source The R amp S FSW starts capturing data as soon as the trigger level is exceeded around the third intermediate frequency For frequency sweeps the third IF represents the start frequency The trigger band width at the third IF depends on the RBW and sweep type For measurements on a fixed frequency e g zero span or UO measurements the third IF represents the center frequency This trigger source is only available for RF input The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 RF Power Trigger Source Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the displayed measurement range For this purpose the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate fre quency The input signal must be in the frequency range between 500 MHz and 8 GHz The resulting trigger level at the RF input depends on the RF attenuation and preampli fication For details on available trigger levels see the instrument s data sheet Note If the input signal contains frequencies outside of this range e g for fullspan measurements the measurement may be aborted and a
85. Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel I 0 Q 0 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 0 I 1 Q 1 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 1 I 2 21 Real and imaginary part of complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex polar data 1 channel Mag 0 Phi 0 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 0 Mag 1 Phi l Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 1 Mag 2 Phi 2 Magnitude and phase part of complex sample 2 UO Data File Format iq tar Example Element order for complex cartesian data 3 channels Complex data I channel no time index Q channel no time index 0 0 Otol 0 Channel 0 Complex sample 0 1 0 Q 1 0 Channel 1 Complex sample 0 2 01 Q 2 0 Channel 2 Complex sample 0 O 1 Q 0 1 Channel 0 Complex sample 1 TY gir Channel 1 Complex sample 1 2 1 O 2111 Channel 2 Complex sample 1 01 2 1 Q 01 21 Channel 0 Complex sample 2 11 21 QI 11 2 Channel 1 Complex sample 2 2 215 OQI2112 Channel 2 Complex sample 2 Example Element order for complex cartesian data 1 channel This example demonstrates how to store complex cartesian data in float32 format using MATLAB o Save vector of complex cartesian I Q data i e iqiqiq N 100 iq randn 1 N 1j randn 1 N fid fopen xyz complex float32 w for k 1 length iq fwrite fid single re
86. G IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 17 Transmit spectral mask for a 20 MHz channel lEEE AC D1 1 20 5 IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 40M 95G IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel lEEE AC D1 1 40 5 IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 80M 5G IEEE P802 11ac D1 1 August 2011 Figure 22 19 Transmit spectral mask for a 80 MHz channel lEEE AC D1 1 80 5 SENSe POWer SEM CLASs Index This command sets the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM power class index The index represents the power classes to be applied The index is directly related to the entries displayed in the power class drop down combo box within the SEM settings configura tion page Parameters Index RST 0 Configuring the Result Display The following commands are required to configure the screen display in a remote envi ronment The corresponding tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 1 Display Configuration on page 44 Configuring the Result Display 0 9 7 1 The suffix n in the following remote commands represents the window 1 16 in the currently selected measurement channel e General Window Commands iere nnt nnn tnt anat ka dan tinh 156 e Working with Windows in the Display 157 e Selecting Items to Display in Result Summary 163 e Configuring the Y Axis Scaling and Untts seen 163 General Window Commands The fol
87. H PSP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 9 Power Spectrum on page 197 PvT Full PPDU Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time traces for all PPDUs 1 PVT Full PPDU 1 Mine 2 Avge 3 Max 100 0 ns 3 190530303 Us Fig 3 9 PvT Full PPDU result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PFPP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 10 Power vs Time PVT on page 197 PvT Rising Edge Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time traces for the rising edge of all PPDUs User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 26 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays 2 PVT Rising ei Mine Avge 3 Max 100 0 ns 300 0 ns Fig 3 10 PvT Rising Edge result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PRIS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 10 Power vs Time PVT on page 197 PvT Falling Edge Displays the minimum average and maximum power vs time traces for the falling edge of all PPDUs 4 PVT Falling 1 Mine 2 Avg e 3 Max 2 890530303 ps 3 290530303 ps Fig 3 11 PvT Falling Edge result display Remote command LAY ADD WIND 2 RIGH PFAL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 10 Power vs Time PVT on page 197 Result Sum
88. INDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric_value Default unit dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe UNIT This command reads the unit type currently configured for the Y axis Usage Query only FORMat BSTReam lt BitStreamFormat gt Switches the format of the bitstream between octet and hexadecimal values Parameters lt BitStreamFormat gt OCTet HEXadecimal Manual operation See Bitstream Format on page 82 9 8 Starting a Measurement When a IEEE 802 11ad measurement channel is activated on the R amp S FSW a IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement see chapter 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Modu lation Accuracy Measurement on page 13 is started immediately However you can stop and start anew measurement any time Furthermore you can perform a sequence of measurements using the Sequencer see Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function on page 10 PB ORR E 168 GAL Gulate n BURSI IMMedialte 4 2 tator turum aE ARR TRIER RAT 168 INMMiate lt n gt ee REIR ACE 169 INI rate sns EIMMediale 3 tie aua Fe Lada Pert beue tette t aa iaaa aaa ENTARTETE 169 Starting a Measurement NiTiatesn SEQUENCE A BOBU ischem
89. LOSS LOW 20dB SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB a Activating automatic signal identification functions Activate both automatic signal identification functions SENS MIX SIGN ALL Use auto ID threshold of 8 dB SENS MIX THR 8dB Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data for the input signal without distortions default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACE3 Configuring a conversion loss table for a user defined band iieri ei iei Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON A Configuring a new conversion loss table Define cvl table for range 1 of band as described in previous example extended V band SENS CORR CVL SEL UserTable SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO RR CVL COMM User defined conversion loss table for USER band R R SENS COR R R R CVL BAND USER CVL HARM 6 CVL BIAS 1mA CVL MIX FS Z260 CVL SNUM 123 4567 R CVL PORT 3 SENS CO SENS CO SENS CO A A N A A A Conversion loss is linear from 55 GHz to 75 GHz SENS CORR CVL DATA 55GHZ 20DB 75GHZ 30DB jp se Configuring the mixer and band settings Use user defined band and assign new cvl table SENS MIX HAR
90. M elle Remote commands DOINGS EE State Band Conversi n loss table 2 nennen 58 Exterrial MIX6E onte timere e ennt 52 External Mixer Remote control 120 Bandwidth M n oe M 45 Bias Conversion loss table sssssessssssss 55 59 External MIXET eenean reme tenencia rais 55 External Mixer Remote control 117 Bitstream Result display tr tret 19 Trace EE 195 C Capture buffer Eltere Rea see also Measurement time Center ME QUEM CY acoso ero ox erect eoe Reno so PEARCE pt PDT rur pe EM M Softkey EE secos ase teach isset torte LO si tL X IPIE DEUS Channel bar Displayed informatii uoo reete tox rores 11 Channel estimation Remote control ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeetseeeesenees 149 Channel frequency response PPardmelerS A erain 13 eelerer EETA 20 WAC data EE 198 Closing Channels remote cececesscecesereeeeeareeeeeeeeeeeaes 110 Windows remote ssem 160 163 Compensation ed EE ret nere cese 78 Connectors IEMIDEOIDEMOD scrssiesnesnocarepanan aani 65 Constellation eelerer AEE EEEE 20 vs symbol trace data sssssesese 195 Continue single sweep c 80 Continuous sweep cc e I 79 Conventions SGPIGCOmEmallds caca nuna 104 Conversion loss External
91. M BAND USER Define band by two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 cvl table UserTable range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX LOSS TABL LOW UserTable SENS MIX HARM HIGH 8 SENS MIX LOSS HIGH 30dB Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Initiate a basic frequency sweep and wait until the sweep has finished INIT WAI Return the trace data default screen configuration TRAC DATA TRACel 9 5 1 4 Configuring the 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 The following commands are required to use the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement See also the command for configuring triggers while using the optional 2 GHz band width extension R amp S FSW B2000 TRIGger SEQuence OSCilloscope COUPling on page 133 Remote commands exclusive to configuring the 2 GHz bandwidth extension EX Pork WAV efor DISPIAV OM 2322 rine rei hb ened stia S ence o Eae eeu R e ERR RARE MER RARE 130 Sv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OSCHloscopel SGSTATel eneee nenen nenen eeeeesesrersre e 130 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCillosc
92. Manual operation See Mixer S N on page 59 Programming Example Working with an External Mixer This example demonstrates how to work with an external mixer in a remote environ ment It is performed in the Spectrum application in the default layout configuration Note that without a real input signal and connected mixer this measurement will not return useful results aaa a a Preparing the instrument Reset the instrument Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement RST Activate the use of the connected external mixer SENS MIX ON sms Configuring basic mixer behavior Set the LO level of the mixer s LO port to 15 dBm SENS MIX LOP 15dBm Set the bias current to 1 mA SENS MIX BIAS LOW 1mA Zeep Configuring the mixer and band settings Use band V to full possible range extent for assigned harmonic 6 SENS MIX HARM BAND V SENS MIX RFOV ON Query the possible range SENS MIX FREQ STAR Result 47480000000 47 48 GHz SENS MIX FREQ STOP Result 138020000000 138 02 GHz Use a 3 port mixer type SENS MIX PORT 3 Split the frequency range into two ranges range 1 covers 47 48 GHz GHz to 80 GHz harmonic 6 average conv loss of 20 dB range 2 covers 80 GHz to 138 02 GHz harmonic 8 average conv loss of 30 dB SENS MIX HARM TYPE EVEN SENS MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON SENS MIX FREQ HAND 80GHz SENS MIX HARM LOW 6 SENS MIX
93. Mixer Remote control 122 Conversion loss tables c ccccscsseeeeeesessseeeeeeeeeees 56 57 Available remote control sese 124 Band remote control Bias remote control COMMUN e Creating Deleting remote control sese External MIXG P External Mixer Remote control i Harmonic order remote Control Importing External Mixer eee Managing Mixer type remote control sssssss Saving External Mixer sse Selecting remote control Shifting values External Mixer ss Values External Mixer s Copying Measurement channel remote 109 Coupling INPUE REMOLE sec dott eter aet etes 115 Crest Factor iei eren eret e geen 13 D Data acquisition see Signal capturing ceteris tege 71 Data format EI ue 192 202 Data input Data output Data symbols Kli e 13 Decimal separator Trace doll EE E DS 90 Delta markers um Defining Diagram footer Diagrams Evaluation method ote ino terr e ennt e nts 30 Display Configuration softkey AN 44 Understanding etnies 11 Drop out time hale CT 41 76 Duplicating Measurement channel remote 109 E Electronic input attenuation ocio t
94. NSe CORRection CVL BIAS lt BiasSetting gt This command defines the bias setting to be used with the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt BiasSetting gt numeric value RST 0 0A Default unit A Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BIAS 3A Manual operation See Write to lt CVL table name gt on page 55 See Bias on page 59 SENSe CORRection CVL CATAlog This command queries all available conversion loss tables saved in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory on the instrument This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Usage Query only SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr This command deletes the selected conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CHL CLE Usage Event Manual operation See Delete Table on page 57 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMent lt Text gt This command defines a comment fo
95. O Input User Manual If the green alignment message is displayed the R amp S FSW is ready to perform a measurement 6 Select the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency How to Determine the SEM for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 7 Select the Data Acquisition button to define how much and which data to capture from the input signal 8 Select the Tracking button to define which distortions will be compensated for 9 Select the Demod button to provide information on the modulated signal and how the PPDUS detected in the capture buffer are to be demodulated 10 Select the Evaluation Range button to define which data in the capture buffer you want to analyze 11 Select the Display Config button and select the displays that are of interest to you up to 16 Arrange them on the display to suit your preferences 12 Exit the SmartGrid mode 13 Start a new sweep with the defined settings e To perform a single sweep measurement press the RUN SINGLE hardkey e To perform a continuous sweep measurement press the RUN CONT hardkey Measurement results are updated once the measurement has completed 8 2 How to Determine the SEM for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 1 Press the MODE key and select the IEEE 802 11ad application The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application UO data acquisition is performed by default 2 Select the required measurement a Press the
96. OMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE sse 131 GvGfemCOMMunicateRDEVice OGCloscope Al Gnment GTEPIZSTATelg 131 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN eese eene eterne rnnt 131 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope LEDState a132 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope TCPip essen 132 Gem COMMunicateRDEVice OGCHlloscope VDE Vie 132 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware essen enne 133 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe SY olem PRESSCCHANNEI EXECUTE rosou ise ea gegen thy eek en EY ux SATE ise hu RT TRAG amp IQ DATAMEMOLy niter eter rr Ernte rre e FER Re ET EENAA Aaien TRACE IQ SRAT 6 e TRAGesns EDATA EX itr tite ote eet t pt etit cet ge D sey Ce ped ete Dv dE HER Ae 194 TRACES DATA RE 192 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe TRIGger SEQuence HOLDOoff TIME itte rtr tert arr rrr rennen TRIGger SEQuericeTlIEFPow er HOLDOff anion ot tette tt t tiep ER ERE EIE SET DRM ER A De eR Ie Ser TRIGger SEQuerice IFPower HYS Teresis ctno ttr terrere en he rr nn n t en paid TRIGger SEQuence D EVel IEPOWSLF 2 1 irr tree tr Rr rnnt tre rr ere eon PR Ee TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower eese nnne nnne NEEE nennen nnns TRIGger SEQuericeELEVel REPOWer otrrtt t reti err tp cei Pret ere en RR Ee TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal lt port gt
97. ORRection CVL PORTs on page 126 Position Value Each position value pair defines the correction value for conversion loss for a specific frequency The reference values must be entered in order of increasing frequencies A maximum of 50 reference values can be entered To enter a new value pair select an empty space in the Position Value table or select the Insert Value button Correction values for frequencies between the reference values are obtained by inter polation Linear interpolation is performed if the table contains only two values If it con tains more than two reference values spline interpolation is carried out Outside the frequency range covered by the table the conversion loss is assumed to be the same as that for the first and last reference value The current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries is displayed in the preview pane to the right of the table Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL DATA on page 125 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Insert Value Inserts a new position value entry in the table If the table is empty a new entry at 0 Hz is inserted If entries already exist a new entry is inserted above the selected entry The position of the new entry is selected such that it divides the span to the previous entry in half Delete Value Deletes the currently selected position value entry Shift x Shifts all positions in the table
98. R ER 110 INS Tr menb RENAME uostri eerte interest a sae eot ate caters nanan odere dE PEIMPM LU CM R INSTr rment SEL6Gt uere aa tree d n YE E REN LAYout ADD WINDow LAY Out CATalog WINDOW 159 EAYeoutIDENtTy WINDOW 1 n tt trece rrr tnnt ren per iene rc aret retia 159 EAYout REMove WINBOW 5 rti rtr ttr ht nera he a reae a Ee at 160 EAYOUTREPEACE EWIN DOW e 160 LAY QUES PLING e 160 EAYOUTWINDOWSM gt 2ADD EE 162 LAYout WINDow lt n gt IDENtify LAYout WINDowsn 7 REMOVe iin ert rr te t rette e EN erada ER CES EES SEENEN Ed EECH EAYout WINDOWSIESREPLAGG n caer corretto eg Serene ead Coda gerat exe teach E eee ee EEE AERE ETAN MMEMory EOAD IQE S TATe oot tt trt Prep kr tnt eren ip eere eek eni Etpe c re n PD eene n MMEMory LOAD SEMiS TAM 6 niii eror toic ape roe corp te cri dv ciet ater e atone MMEMory ST ORGsn gt 1 GOMMNBTL norton rtr egeo a EEEE AAEE USUS AN CS MMEMeory STOResn IQ STA Te err rrr ern nerit dar ne ee P a abc nep VE Xd Deng MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe EEN He OUTPUEIF Re EE OUT Put IRIGger port DIRGCIOR n rin o rrt e hh rentre It e tu etn erre tr eoa pa rra rk OUTPUETRIGGErS pon WEY d S NN eg ee e en Geh d ttr rri pen ere ener eren ert n rne ten envie te rrr dy ads OUTPut TRIGger lt
99. R amp S9FSW K95 802 11ad Measurements User Manual l Chaney Freue Ne EAT CE ga H CI tior DMG PHY Type 1177 5962 02 01 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ Test amp Measurement User Manual This manual applies to the following R amp S FSW models with firmware version 2 30 and higher R amp S9 FSWS 1312 8000K08 R amp S FSW13 1312 8000K13 R amp S FSW26 1312 8000K26 R amp S FSW43 1312 8000K43 R amp S FSW50 1312 8000K50 R amp S FSW67 1312 8000K67 R amp S FSW85 1312 8000K85 The following firmware options are described e R amp S FSW K95 802 11ad measurements 1313 1639 02 2015 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 Email info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9FSW is abbreviated as R amp S FSW R amp S9FSW K95 Contents Contents E oi e 5 Li About this Manual 5 iecore inner dinners sonaeceeesseaedanesssesecneeaseeeecriis 5 1 2 Documentation Overview eeeeeeeeeeeneeeenenen nennen nennen nn nnn nini n nennen nnn nennen 5 1 3 Conventions Used in th
100. RACe t Y SCALe RVALue esses 166 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum sese 167 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum eeeeeeeee n 167 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACects lt SCALelUNIT nennen 167 FORM amp SEBS DREAM E 167 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe Unit UNIT ANGLe Unit This command selects the global unit for all phase results Parameters Unit DEG RAD Manual operation See Phase Unit on page 82 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT FREQuency Unit This command selects the global unit for all frequency results Parameters Unit REL ABS RST REL CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer Unit This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all power based measurement windows regardless of the n suf fix Parameters Unit DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Manual operation See Unit on page 69 Configuring the Result Display DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt X SCALe UNIT This command reads the unit type currently configured for the X axis Usage Query only DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe AUTO State If enabled the Y axis is scaled automatically according to the current measurement Suffix lt t gt irrelevant Parame
101. S FSW 802 11ad application extends the functionality of the R amp S FSW to enable accurate and reproducible Tx measurements of a IEEE 802 11ad device under test DUT in accordance with the IEEE standard 802 11ad The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application features e Support for data rates of up to 7 Gbit s Use of the 60 GHz unlicensed band Provides global availability Avoids the overcrowded 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz bands Uses short wavelengths 5 mm at 60 GHz making compact and affordable antennas or antenna arrays possible e Backward compatibility with the IEEE 802 11 universe Seamless use of IEEE 802 11a b g n across both bands 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz plus 11ad in the 60 GHz range gt triband devices Typical applications for IEEE 802 11ad are e Wireless Display e Distribution of HDTV content e g in residential living rooms e Wireless PC connection to transmit huge files quickly e Automatic sync applications e g uploading images from a camera to a PC kiosk applications optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 to analyze IEEE 802 11ad sig o Due to the use of a 2 GHz bandwidth the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application requires the nals This user manual contains a description of the functionality that is specific to the appli cation including remote control operation Functions that are not discussed in this manual are the same as in the Spectrum appli cation and are described in the R amp S FSW U
102. SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 153 5 2 7 Sweep Settings Access SWEEP The sweep settings define how the data is measured Continuous Sweep RUN CONT sssssssssssesee nennen nnne tens nsn senten nnns en nennt 79 Single Sweep RUN GINGLE EE 80 Continue Single SWODD aeien e ete agere tea x tu teste eee tes ahmed aa 80 suci TIME c 80 e EE EE ui E 80 Continuous Sweep RUN CONT After triggering starts the sweep and repeats it continuously until stopped This is the default setting While the measurement is running the Continuous Sweep softkey and the RUN CONT key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again The results are not deleted until a new measurement is started Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN CONT key controls the Sequencer not indi vidual sweeps RUN CONT starts the Sequencer in continuous mode Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 169 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Single Sweep RUN SINGLE While the measurement is running the Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the high lighted softkey or key again Note Sequencer Furthermore the RUN SINGLE key controls the Sequencer not individual sweeps RUN SINGLE starts the Sequencer in single mode If the Sequencer is off only the evaluat
103. SEQuence SOURce Source This command selects the trigger source Note on external triggers If a measurement is configured to wait for an external trigger signal in a remote control program remote control is blocked until the trigger is received and the program can continue Make sure this situation is avoided in your remote control programs Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt Source gt Example Manual operation IMMediate Free Run EXTernal Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT connector EXT2 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input EXT3 Trigger signal from the TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector Note Connector must be configured for Input RFPower First intermediate frequency IFPower Second intermediate frequency IQPower Magnitude of sampled UO data For applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications RST IMMediate TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal See Trigger Source on page 74 See Free Run on page 74 See External Trigger 1 2 3 on page 74 See IF Power on page 75 See RF Power on page 75 See 1 Q Power on page 75 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval Interval This command defines the repetition interval for the time trigger Parameters Interval Example 2 0 ms to 5000 Ra
104. T Spectrum trace data AA 197 Files Format VQ data tete nes 211 UO data binary XML ssssnes 215 VQ data input e tee 37 49 UO parameter XML eee 212 Format Data remole nett etes 192 202 Free Run eet oio esee cn ae esta fexus dde eit tn 74 Freq Error vs Preamble Kesult displays uiscera gin eem e nds 21 Frequency COMMQUPALION ecco oce Dove etes on UR Texte ete dE 66 Configuration remote sssee 135 IF Out Offset Frequency Error vs symbol trace data A 196 Frontend Configuration remote ssseee 135 TE EE 39 G Gain imbalance orent entrain 13 15 H Handover frequency External KEE 52 External Mixer Remote control 119 Harmonics Conversion loss table rens 58 External Mixer Remote control de Order External Mixer so OS Type Extemal MIXET cxt eintreten 53 Header Info Trace data e e rre oer tre tene 197 Header information Result display 5 mre ener 22 Hysteresis TAGGET 76 l UO data Export file binary data description 215 Export file parameter description 212 EXPOMUMG nocere oet ores oc de Pad erede 47 96 Exporting emote esce cnt ten intente 200 Exporting Importihg ccito en iternm torn cite 97 Importing
105. TRACe1 10 DATA MEMory 2641 5282 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the current EVM vs symbol trace window 4 TRAC4 DATA TRACE1 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the result of the average EVM for all symbols in the PPDU FETC EVM ALL AVER 9 12 2 Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad application E Exporting Captured I Q Data Store the captured I Q data to a file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask RST Reset the instrument INST CRE NEW WiGig SEMMeasurement Activate a 802 11ad measurement channel named SEMMeasurement dee Eeer g Configuring the measurement DISP TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the reference level to 0 dBm FREQ CENT 2 1175 GHz Set the center frequency to 2 1175 GHz SENS SWE MODE ESP Select the spectrum emission mask measurement 4 222252 Performing the Measurement INIT CONT OFF Stops continuous sweep SWE COUN 100 Sets the number of sweeps to be performed to 100 INIT WAI Start a new measurement with 100 sweeps and wait for the end dees Retrieving Results CALC LIM FAIL Queries the result of the limit check Result 0 passed TRAC DATA LIST Retrieves the peak list of the spectrum emission mask measurement Resul
106. Y WIND IDEN 2 Queries the index of the result display named 2 Response 2 Usage Query only LAYout REMove WINDow lt WindowName gt This command removes a window from the display in the active measurement channel Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the window In the default state the name of the window is its index Example LAY REM 2 Removes the result display in the window named 2 Usage Event LAYout REPLace WINDow lt WindowName gt lt WindowType gt This command replaces the window type for example from Diagram to Result Sum mary of an already existing window in the active measurement channel while keeping its position index and window name To add a new window use the LAYout ADD WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows in the active measurement channel use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt WindowType gt Type of result display you want to use in the existing window See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 for a list of availa ble window types Example LAY REPL WIND 1 MTAB Replaces the result display in window 1 with a marker table LAYout SPLitter lt Index1 gt lt Index2 gt lt Position gt This command changes the position of a splitter and thus controls the size of the
107. ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix of the missing keyword is assumed to be the value 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow 1 42 200M STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Alternative Keywords A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ SCPI Parameters Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle 9 2 6 1 Introduction Parameters may have differ
108. a 197 e Channel Frequency RespOoNnse eop iiie ect eee riri esi Uo aiiai ENEE 198 Bitstream For a given OFDM symbol and a given subcarrier the bitstream result is derived from the corresponding complex constellation point according to Std IEEE802 11 2012 Fig ure 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encoding The bit pattern binary representation is converted to its equivalent integer value as the final measurement result The number of values returend for each analyzed OFDM symbol corresponds to the number of data subcarriers plus the number of pilot subcariers Nap Ngp in remote mode As opposed to the graphical Bitstream results the DC and NULL carriers are not avail able in remote mode Constellation This measurement represents the complex constellation points as and Q data See for example IEEE Std 802 11 2012 Fig 18 10 BPSK QPSK 16 QAM and 64 QAM constellation bit encoding Each and Q point is returned in floating point format Retrieving Results Data is returned as a repeating array of interleaved and Q data in groups of selected carriers per OFDM Symbol until all the and Q data for the analyzed OFDM Symbols is exhausted The following carrier selections are possible e All Carriers CONFigure BURSt CONStellation CARRier SELect ALL Ns pairs of and Q data per OFDM Symbol OFDM Symbol 1 l4 Q4 1 H2 Q1 2 UI uer Q1 st OFDM Symbol 2 I24 Q21 122 Q22 buet Q2 s
109. a file remote sade I Q data fils er eter tr eene 37 49 wn WEE 9 K Keys BW C M eel LUNES ere aceon a rete Cen e rta bet tied MKR FUNCT RUN CONT RUN SINGLE zs SPAN s idt seen tti cete e me cue e de dee ud L Level MrACKING zisirei M H 78 Level error tracking 2 er mr ree 149 Lines Mem 45 Linking EN Ccre M 93 LO Level External Mixer remote control 117 Level External Mixer 54 M Magnitude Capture KResultldisplay 3 ette e con dte 23 Trace data acere ra ecc 195 197 Marker Functions Mengt iocis dee to reset de oe DER eate ebd 45 Marker search area Remote COMO s iiio reet Eege 177 Marker table Belt le Ui DE Evaluation method m M rKerto Trage i ice eterno ir enano en Markers ASSIgIIe CACC ite Shes chunk oer Deren n Rd 93 Configuration softkey dun CONIO ssec deponere bte ha UR ener tte CIR etes 91 Deactivatiigi errre 93 Delta markers wi 02 General settings remote 176 EKINO ci hcec ie 09 Minimum remote control 177 Next minimum remote control 177 Next peak remote control ssessssse 177 Peak remote control sees 177 Querying position remote sees 199 Search remote control AA 177 Settings remote AAA
110. aaa Fa ka Ea nates 125 SENSe I CORRecton C VESIDA TA EE 125 SENSe ICORBection CVE HARMORIG e erret e prn bpe etae adc mn eig ee e REED dd 126 SENSeTCORRectioh CYL MIXET crionna ba Ee eet laeua e AA a 126 SENSe CORR amp ection CVEIPORT Sis inicie iriure ianiai aia aa aule asiaa iNNi 126 E ee e Ee 127 SENSeTCORRection CVL SNIMDBOr uet tra aee forced ota ttr rette rere td d vera AAE 127 SENSe CORRection CVL BAND Type This command defines the waveguide band for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt Band gt K A KA Q U VJE W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Note The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA the input parameter A is still available and refers to the same band as KA For a definition of the frequency range for the pre defined bands see table 9 4 RST F 90 GHz 140 GHz Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL BAND KA Sets the band to KA 26 5 GHz 40 GHz Manual operation See Band on page 58 SE
111. agrams where possible The suffix t is irrelevant Parameters Value numeric value WITHOUT UNIT unit according to the result dis play Defines the range per division total range 10 lt Value gt RST depends on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y PDIV 10 Sets the grid spacing to 10 units e g dB per division Manual operation See Per Division on page 84 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition Position This command defines the vertical position of the reference level on the display grid for all traces t is irrelevant The R amp S FSW adjusts the scaling of the y axis accordingly Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Ref Position on page 84 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue Value This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Suffix lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value WITHOUT UNIT Default unit dBm Manual operation See Ref Value on page 84 Starting a Measurement DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum Value This command defines the maximum value on the y axis for all traces in the specified window The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt numeric value Default unit dBm DISPlay W
112. al iq k float32 fwrite fid single imag iq k float32 end fclose fid List of Remote Commands 802 1 1ad SENSE JAD JUSt LEV Sli cii retta aet ect ee tan ete D e ee c eda aaa dp ae SENSe AVERagesn COUNG emt I SENSe IBURSEGOUNL n rre ee co corr o pu dt pter d Ec C E E EORR IE nia nies LA ee Re SETA SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe SENSE BURSGSEL EC sete ucese sso M SENSe BURSt SELect STATe SENSe ICORRSsction C VIE BAND cte tee E getto ci een tah ee retinal e E te eu ou 123 SENSe ICORRSction GVE BIAS EE 124 SENSe CORRection CVIECATAIOG ice n in cr esa e ett eee Rer antennas 124 SENSe CORRection C VI GEBAT cites rene tte t P tt Mined nee eae Dt egent 124 SENSe CORRection CVE COMMEN sniene EERSTEN SEENEN SEA a usa R iD aT 125 SENSe CORRScIiOn VIE DATA coit ret terreni cr eager ERE sea ee e RATE EFE ecu aie 125 SENSe IGORRSection C VE EIARMORIG croit eie yal Dee ee ied fet e ba e D Ede 126 ISENS etel sio lege Ip 126 SENSE leeden AE RE 126 SENSe CORRection CVIE SEL GGE criteri e Sieh any etd res DO ate 127 SENSe CORRsction GVIESNUMDAFE s i dr oet rote repeat eed he vec bu Yea state ntsaynedaenrmean sees 127 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal sss een 151 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX essen nennen 152 IEN Ge IDEMod FORMatCBANalvze GvMpols MIN 152 SENSE Ta elle ee
113. ance corresponds to the difference in amplification of the and Q channel and therefore to the difference in amplitude of the signal components In the vector dia gram the length of the vector changes relative to the length of the Q vector The result is displayed in dB and where 1 dB offset corresponds to roughly 12 difference between the and Q gain according to the following equation Imbalance dB 20log Gaing Gain Positive values mean that the Q vector is amplified more than the vector by the corre sponding percentage For example using the figures mentioned above 0 98 20 log10 1 12 1 3 1 1 3 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Fig 3 2 Positive gain imbalance Negative values mean that the vector is amplified more than the Q vector by the cor responding percentage For example using the figures mentioned above 0 98 20 log10 1 1 12 Fig 3 3 Negative gain imbalance Quadrature Offset An ideal UO modulator sets the phase angle between the and Q path mixer to exactly 90 degrees With a quadrature offset the phase angle deviates from the ideal 90 degrees the amplitudes of both components are of the same size In the vector dia gram the quadrature offset causes the coordinate system to shift A positive quadrature offset means a phase angle greater than 90 degrees IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Fig 3 4 Positive quadrature offset A ne
114. and specifies whether the harmonic order to be used should be odd even or both Which harmonics are supported depends on the mixer type Parameters lt OddEven gt ODD EVEN EODD RST EVEN Example MIX HARM TYPE ODD Manual operation See Harmonic Type on page 53 SENSe MIXer HARMonic LOW lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the low first range Parameters lt HarmOrder gt numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition RST 2 for band F Example MIX HARM 3 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 53 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire high sec ond range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS HIGH 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 53 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the high second range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL HIGH MyCVLTable Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 53 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW lt FileName gt This command defines the file name of the conversion loss table to be used for the low f
115. arated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another Only the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands are described here For a more complete description refer to the User Manual of the R amp S FSW Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this general introduction may not be supported by this particular application Conventions used in Descriptions Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions Command usage 9 2 2 9 2 3 Introduction If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a parameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S FSW follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which d
116. arker cmz TRACE rcns srsesnanoi eia R aaa aE EET ENE CALCulate n DELTamarker m X es CALCulatesn DEETamarkersme XRELatiVe orte crece tte ro crece i eects 198 Lee E E ET E uh GE 199 GALGulate n DELTamarkersm STATe ieto repre tonne rne rti rtt nt eese 175 GAL GCulatesn bIMitsko E ATE coire c ic cat ree ege ee err nece BEER v ones 190 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF zi 2 CALGCu latesn gt MARKeremMA BE 176 CALCulatesn gt MARKersm gt LINK TOMAbkercmz ancaire Kaadaa NAKE iaka iai 173 CAL Culate nzMAbkercmzLOENcude A 177 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MAXimum LEFT 477 GAL Culate n MARKer m MAXimum 3iNEXT ioci eo uere deret eta acea cement a anise apie 178 CAL Culate nz MAbkercmz MA NimumbRIlCGHt eene enne nennen nnn snnt n nnns nnne 178 GALCulate n MARKer m MAXimumy PEAK 2 oett tnn tnn tnt nn rh ntn rennen 178 CAL Culatesn gt MARKer lt m gt MINiMUMILEF T 1 2 rite rere cie roti eevee E tug 178 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt MINimum NEXT 178 CALCulate n MARKer m MINimumt RIGE erie ceeer cessation editar ec uaque ue Cup unu 179 CALCulatesn MARKer m MINim mpP EAKJ iacu carr dae ete een taire ect EY iure eed 178 CAL CGulate nz MAbkercmz PE NCursion eene enne nennen nennen en rnr rnnt rennen 177 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe us CAL Culatesr MARKGESIP X cire silent caedit ere E Erat exe era koe Poveda
117. asurement channels which are required in order to replace or delete the channels R amp S FSW K95 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements Return values lt ChannelType gt For each channel the command returns the channel type and lt ChannelName gt channel name see tables below Tip to change the channel name use the INSTrument REName command Example INST LIST Result for 3 measurement channels ADEM Analog Demod IQ IQ Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer2 Usage Query only Table 9 3 Available measurement channel types and default channel names in Signal and Spectrum Analyzer mode Application lt ChannelType gt Default Channel Name Parameter Spectrum SANALYZER Spectrum UO Analyzer IQ IQ Analyzer Pulse R amp S FSW K6 PULSE Pulse Analog Demodulation R amp S FSW K7 ADEM Analog Demod GSM R amp S FSW K10 GSM GSM Multi Carrier Group Delay R amp S FSW K17 MCGD MC Group Delay Amplifier Measurements R amp S FSW K18 AMPLifier Amplifier Noise R amp S FSW K30 NOISE Noise Phase Noise R amp S FSW K40 PNOISE Phase Noise Transient Analysis R amp S FSW K60 TA Transient Analysis VSA R amp S FSW K70 DDEM VSA 3GPP FDD BTS R amp S FSW K72 BWCD 3G FDD BTS 3GPP FDD UE R amp S FSW K73 MWCD 3G FDD UE TD SCDMA BTS R amp S FSW K76 BTDS TD SCDMA BTS TD SCDMA UE R amp S FSW K77 MTDS TD SCDMA UE cdma2000 BTS R amp S
118. at the IF VIDEO DEMOD or IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW 9 5 2 9 5 2 1 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt Source gt IF The measured IF value is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output connector The frequency at which the IF value is provided is defined using the OUTPut IF IFFRequency command IF2 The measured IF value is available at the IF OUT 2 GHZ output connector at a frequency of 2 GHz This setting is only available if the IF OUT 2 GHZ connector or the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 is available viDeo The displayed video signal i e the filtered and detected IF sig nal 200mV is available at the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector This setting is required to provide demodulated audio frequen cies at the output RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF VIDEO DEMOD output con nector Manual operation See IF Video Output on page 64 Frontend Configuration The following commands configure frequency amplitude and y axis scaling settings which represent the frontend of the measurement setup e E e 135 e Amplitude Settings sen EE eoi anite ion a oxi o L Ret felted eegen 137 Frequency SENSeJ FREQuencyr ENEE eege rnanis riad niipea ienaa iaaiaee Ru RES 135 ISEBNSeTEREOUSRnOV EN STEP ite ities onda treat ru Ee 136 ISENSeREOueno CENTer STER AUTO 136 SENS FREQUEN OFESBLU TE 136 SENSe FREQ
119. bles on page 57 Note that only common conversion loss tables in ac1 files can be edited Special B2000 tables in b2g files can only be imported and deleted Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Delete Table Deletes the currently selected conversion loss table after you confirm the action Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL CLEAr on page 124 Import Table Imports a stored conversion loss table from any directory and copies it to the instru ment s C r_s instr user cv1 directory It can then be assigned for use for a specific frequency range see Conversion loss on page 53 Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table New Table Edit Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table New Table Edit Table Conversion loss tables can be newly defined and edited A preview pane displays the current configuration of the conversion loss function as described by the position value entries Table File Name USERTABLE Comment User defined conversion loss table for USER band Band Settings Band Mixer Name rs Zeg Harmonic Order mixer S N 123 4567 55 00000000000 GHz 75 00000000000 GHz IEEE
120. by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the x axis Shift y Shifts all conversion loss values by a specific value The value can be entered in the edit dialog box The conversion loss function in the preview pane is shifted along the y axis Save The conversion loss table is stored under the specified name in the C r_s instr user cv1 directory of the instrument Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application supports the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 if installed The following settings are available for the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 e General E nennen trennen therein ntes nennen 60 LEE CSDL LOUER 62 General Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt B2000 Config gt Settings R amp S FSW K95 Configuration ur o ng M Input Source Power Sensor External Generator Probes B2000 Settings B2000 State TCPIP Address or Computer name Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel EET k ki 1 m Sr H ouo oooga The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box B2000 State Activates the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 Note Manual operation on the connected oscilloscope or remote operation other than
121. cally during a connection for example someone moves between a BluRay player and a projector during a 3DHD connection Both can be managed in realtime by using beamforming Because the antenna size in the 60 GHz band is very compact small and competitive antenna arrays can be used IEEE 802 11ad supports beamforming in realtime During the beam refinement process training sequences for beamforming are sent between the transmitter and receiver and evaluated The best antenna weightings for each situation can then be set Beamforming training sequences can be appended to all PHY packages control SC low power SC and OFDM for this purpose The package type and training length are set accordingly in the corresponding header Phase level and timing tracking Golay sequences are also used as guard intervals which are inserted after each 512 symbols see figure 4 2 These guard intervals are used for phase tracking that is compensating the estimated phase error The values that have been compensated by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application based on this phase estimation are displayed in the Phase Tracking vs Symbol on page 25 result display After the phase tracking User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 34 Measurement Setup and other compensation for example for level or time has been applied further results such as the EVM are calculated 1 Phase Level and Timing Tracking for Payload Correlate Phase Estimate Golay
122. chwarz com Fileformat version 1 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 8 How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S 8 1 FSW 802 11ad application The following step by step instructions demonstrate how to perform measurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application The following tasks are described e How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for IEEE 802 11ad Signals e How to Determine the SEM for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 101 How to Determine Modulation Accuracy Parameters for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 3 Select the IEEE 802 11ad item 802 11ad The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 4 Select the Overview softkey to display the Overview for a IEEE 802 11ad mea surement 5 Activate the B2000 option a Select the Input Frontend button and switch to the B2000 tab b Set the State of the B2000 option to On C If necessary enter the IP address or computer name of the connected oscillo Scope d Check the alignment status displayed under the IP address or computer name of the oscilloscope If UNCAL or an error message is displayed perform an alignment first as descri bed in the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and U
123. clude Instrument Measurement Settings Includes additional instrument and measurement settings in the header of the export file for result data Remote command FORMat DEXPort HEADer on page 202 Export all Traces for Selected Graph Includes all traces for the currently selected graphical result display in the export file Remote command FORMat DEXPort GRAPh on page 202 Trace to Export Defines an individual trace that will be exported to a file This setting is not available if Export all Traces and all Table Results is selected Decimal Separator Defines the decimal separator for floating point numerals for the data export files Eval uation programs require different separators in different languages Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 202 Export Trace to ASCII File Opens a file selection dialog box and saves the selected trace in ASCII format dat to the specified file and directory The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protectin
124. d Trace data can also be exported to an ASCII file for further analysis For details see chapter 6 2 1 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 89 6 2 1 Trace Data Export Configuration CT Access Save gt Export gt Trace Export Config or TRACE gt Trace Config Trace Data Export that are available for all R amp S FSW applications are not described here D The standard data management functions e g saving or loading instrument settings Traces Trace Data Export Export all Traces and all Table Results Include Instrument amp Measurement Settings Export all Traces for Selected Graph Trace to Export 1 Decimal Separator Point Comma Export to ASCII File Export all Traces and all Table Results 1 eren nnet nnn 89 Include Instrument Measurement Settings eeeeeeeeeee eene innen 90 Export all Traces for KE DEE 90 Taca TO EXON ERU 90 RS EE TE 90 TEILEN 90 Export all Traces and all Table Results Selects all displayed traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker table etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file Alternatively you can select one specific trace only for export see Trace to Export 6 3 Markers The results are output in the same order as they are displayed on the screen window by window trace by trace and table row by table row Remote command FORMat DEXPort TRACes on page 202 In
125. d links normal marker lt m1 gt to any active normal marker lt m2 gt If you change the horizontal position of marker lt m2 gt marker lt m1 gt changes its hori zontal position to the same value Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK4 LINK TO MARK2 ON Links marker 4 to marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe State This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is cur rently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 See Marker State on page 92 See Marker Type on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace the marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace 1to6 Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 Manual operation See Assigning the Marker to a Trace on page 93 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker
126. data decoded lower left 3 Result Summary default lower right 4 EVM vs Symbol next to Mag Capt LAY ADD WIND 1 RIGH EVSY Result 4 LAY REPL WIND 2 DDBS Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad application ffessssseses Configuring Data Acquisition Each measurement captures data for 1 ms SWE TIME 1ms Perform 10 measurements SENS SWE COUN 10 Set the input sample rate for the captured I Q data to 2 64 GHz TRAC IQ SRAT 2 64GHZ Number of samples captured per measurement 0 001s 2 64e9 samples per second 2 640 000 samples Tracking Disable all tracking and compensation functions SENS TRAC LEV OFF SENS TRAC PHAS OFF SENS TRAC IOMC OFF a a a Result configuration settings Define units for EVM dBm and bitstream hexa results CALC UNIT POW DBM FORM BSTR HEXA ps2 Performing the Measurements Run 10 blocking single measurements INITiate IMMediate WAI eebe Evaluation range settings Analyze only the first PPDU SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 1 ees Retrieving Results Query the I Q data from magnitude capture buffer for first ms 2 640 000 samples per second gt 2640 samples TRACe1 1Q DATA MEMory 0 2640 Note result will be too long to display in IECWIN but is stored in log file Query the I Q data from magnitude capture buffer for second ms
127. data using the UO Analyzer application if available and then analyze that data later using the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values UO data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format Multi channel data is not supported The UO data is stored in a format with the file extension ig tar For a detailed description see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual e Impor Export EUlCUOFNS ue naaa xd n eR E ERE TR aai EE a 95 s Howto Export and Import VO Dalla ere rd etd tete n eet 97 Import Export Functions The following import and export functions are available via softkeys in the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you select the Save or Open icon in the tool bar These functions are only available if no measurement is running In particular if Continuous Sweep RUN CONT is active the import export functions are not available These functions are maintained for compatibilty with other R amp S FSW applications However it is recommended that you use the UO file input function in the Input Source settings see Settings for Input from UO Data Files on page 49 For a description of the other functions in the Save Recall menu see the R amp S FSW User Manual OUR C SOO 96 DM ed eo MEN NR RN 96
128. de Value RF Attenuation The RF attenuation can be set automatically as a function of the selected reference level Auto mode This ensures that no overload occurs at the RF INPUT connector for the current reference level It is the default setting By default and when electronic attenuation is not available mechanical attenuation is applied In Manual mode you can set the RF attenuation in 1 dB steps down to 0 dB Other entries are rounded to the next integer value The range is specified in the data sheet If the defined reference level cannot be set for the defined RF attenuation the refer ence level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed NOTICE Risk of hardware damage due to high power levels When decreasing the attenuation manually ensure that the power level does not exceed the maximum level allowed at the RF input as an overload may lead to hardware damage Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 138 INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 139 Using Electronic Attenuation If the optional Electronic Attenuation hardware is installed on the R amp S FSW you can also activate an electronic attenuator In Auto mode the settings are defined automatically in Manual mode you can define the mechanical and electronic attenuation separately Note Electronic attenuation is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 13 6 GHz In Auto mode RF attenuation i
129. dialog box to select an input file that contains UO data Note that the UO data must have a specific format iq tar as described in chap ter A 2 I Q Data File Format iq tar on page 211 The default storage location for UO data files is C R_S Instr user Remote command INPut FILE PATH on page 116 External Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer If installed the optional external mixer can be configured from the R amp S FSW 802 1 1ad application s NKO SONOS ERR 50 e Basic Settings oeste ae E Aa a ANARE AAA AARRE 54 e Managing Conversion Loss Tables eene 55 e Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables sse 57 Mixer Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Mixer Settings In this tab you configure the band and specific mixer settings IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Input Source Radio On r op Mixer Settings Basic Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Band Settings Mixer Type RF Start m RF Stop Handover Freq RF Overrange Preset Band Mixer Settings Range Harmonic Type Harmonic Order Conversion Loss CENMNEDINEE EE CONMEEENNNN
130. ditional UO Analyzer channel named IQAnalyzer2 INSTrument CREate REPLace lt ChannelName1 gt lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName2 gt This command replaces a measurement channel with another one Setting parameters ChannelName1 String containing the name of the measurement channel you want to replace lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 110 lt ChannelName2 gt String containing the name of the new channel Note If the specified name for a new channel already exists the default name extended by a sequential number is used for the new channel see INSTrument LIST on page 110 Example INST CRE REPL IQAnalyzer2 IQ IQAnalyzer Replaces the channel named IQAnalyzer2 by a new measure ment channel of type IQ Analyzer named IQAnalyzer Usage Setting only INSTrument DELete lt ChannelName gt This command deletes a measurement channel If you delete the last measurement channel the default Spectrum channel is activa ted Parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel you want to delete A measurement channel must exist in order to be able delete it Example INST DEL IQAnalyzer4 Deletes the channel with the name IQAnalyzer4 Usage Event INSTrument LIST This command queries all active measurement channels This is useful in order to obtain the names of the existing me
131. e INIT CONT OFF Switches the measurement mode to single measurement INIT CONT ON Switches the measurement mode to continuous measurement Manual operation See Continuous Sweep RUN CONT on page 79 INITiate lt n gt IMMediate This command starts a single new measurement You can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Usage Event Manual operation See Single Sweep RUN SINGLE on page 80 Starting a Measurement INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt This command stops the currently active sequence of measurements The Sequencer itself is not deactivated so you can start a new sequence immediately using INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 170 To deactivate the Sequencer use SYSTem SEQuencer on page 171 Suffix n irrelevant Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate This command starts a new sequence of measurements by the Sequencer Its effect is similar to the INITiate lt n gt IMMediate command used for a single measurement Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 171 Suffix n irrelevant Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the seque
132. e SENSe MIXer STATe on page 117 Parameters BiasSetting RST 0 0A Default unit A Manual operation See Bias Settings on page 55 SENSe MIXer LOPower Level This command specifies the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Parameters Level numeric value Range 13 0 dBm to 17 0 dBm Increment 0 1 dB RST 15 5 dBm Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Example MIX LOP 16 0dBm Manual operation See LO Level on page 54 SENSe MIXer SIGNal State This command specifies whether automatic signal detection is active or not Note that automatic signal identification is only available for measurements that per form frequency sweeps not in vector signal analysis or the UO Analyzer for instance Parameters State OFF ON AUTO ALL OFF No automatic signal detection is active ON Automatic signal detection Signal ID is active AUTO Automatic signal detection Auto ID is active ALL Both automatic signal detection functions Signal ID Auto ID are active RST OFF Manual operation See Signal ID on page 54 See Auto ID on page 55 SENSe MIXer THReshold Value This command defines the maximum permissible level difference between test sweep and reference sweep to be corrected during automatic comparison see SENSe MIXer SIGNal on page 118 Parameters Value numeric value Range 0 1 dB to 100 dB RST 10 dB Example MIX PORT 3
133. e Documentation eene nnnm 7 2 Welcome to the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 9 2 4 Starting the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application cesses 10 2 2 Understanding the Display Information eee 11 3 Measurements and Result Displays esee 13 3 4 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement eee 13 3 2 SEM Measuremients roe geen 28 4 Measurement Basl6s o eee uae tou trina Crean bra eae ee mnis usu Suas 32 4 1 Characteristics of the IEEE 802 11ad Standard eese 32 4 2 Measurement Setup triti rer nete uuo n nux oos RE IER Rin n RR arvana NN aaar EE 35 4 3 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output eeeeeeesesse 36 44 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters 39 4 5 Triggered Measurements eese nennen nennen nnn nnn nnn nini 40 4 6 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option PEE 43 Mec me AA 5 1 Display Configuratlon seisein RE NEEE ENAREN 44 5 2 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement eene 44 5 9 SEM Measuremients rmt nett riae E I espe Eege 84 ONE nl
134. e chap ter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 FETChIBURSEALESM EE 187 FETOIYGEACIORAVERAUS E 188 FETGh GFAOCIOCMAXITIER 22 n epe ac tenere pa aaro a aequ dre DESEN Pata P Yen 188 FETCIGFACIOPM INGUIN irt dioi ten oot pn too het da e odes rueda eere md ti qug 188 FEICh GFERror AVERageE inert eroe Ee avo EE ta ae edu sv ako sese oye a edd de 188 FETCH re OR Lu KE 188 FETCHCFERrOr MINIMUM E 188 PET CHIE VIMCALIAY e 188 FET GCHIEV MALE MARIAN caniin a EES ES AG EEN 188 FETCH RTE Ilan NEE 188 FETCHIEVMIDATA AV e E 188 FETChEVNMIDATAMIAXIINGNm 122 2 onm I rra Tov Ya YE Tc a TERES ED S yEPY TY YT YE E CYEP Y FPPPIWeF RS rr cci ug ia 188 ai BS ob AO Ke Re Old ln EE 188 PEMCHIEVMIPILORAVERAQG 22 2 1 1 ipai etin peut EENEG ENKEN EENEG 188 FETCHIEVMIPIEOBMAXImDITIO ees IDEE IR Ed 188 aere Al Tee TE KEE 188 FETChETlMeAvtERage cece cae ae kaanin ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesasaeaeaaaaaaaaneeenenes 189 hee e E ut KE 189 EEGEN ico sed osa es eo ert ea He red ora Dope setas uero docenti eed Peas e 189 a leie EE 189 al hee del KEE 189 FETCH GIMBalahice MINIMUM Z issiria e a a ieoa aedis eaa 189 FEIChIQOFISetAVERGge oar aE E SE ette EE E ANTEA 189 See et EN i KEE 189 FETOhJGOPISSEMIBIIURIG iu tris en eei rne taroen uua eoe d atenta aa aE aSa T ees 189 FETCh QUADertortAVERage ite n taedet SEENEN AA EEN 189 FETGh QUADerrorMAXIRUID 1 uaidiee itat tetti npn acre mee ne Ran Rc e iR AAE RAEE 189 FETCh
135. e detected 1 14 These bits are not used 15 This bit is always 0 Querying the Status Registers The following commands are required to query the status of the R amp S FSW and the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual e General Status Register Commandes 205 e Reading Out the EVEN Pat AA 205 e Reading Out the CONDOM OF tte rettet eher 205 e Controlling the ENABle Part 206 e Controlling the Negative Transition Part 206 e Controlling the Positive Transition Parl ent ttt 206 9 11 2 1 9 11 2 2 9 11 2 3 Status Registers General Status Register Commands STA let PRE EE 205 STATus QUEue NEXT tate titt tnnt tnt tette a t tad d ttt d ta atta tad 205 STATus PRESet This command resets the edge detectors and ENAB1e parts of all registers to a defined value All PTRansition parts are set to FFFFh i e all transitions from O to 1 are detected All NTRansition parts are set to 0 i e a transition from 1 to O in a CONDition bit is not detected The ENAB1e part of the STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers are set to 0 i e all events in these registers are not passed on Usage Event STATus QUEue NEXT This command queries the most recent error queue entry and deletes it Positive error numbers indicate device speci
136. e lt n gt TRACe command ALL Selects all active traces and result tables e g Result Summary marker peak list etc in the current application for export to an ASCII file The trace parameter for the MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe command is ignored RST SINGIe Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export all Traces and all Table Results on page 89 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command exports trace data from the specified window to an ASCII file Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters lt Trace gt Number of the trace to be stored lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR1 TRAC 3 C NTEST ASC Stores trace 3 from window 1 in the file TEST ASC Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Export Trace to ASCII File on page 90 Status Registers The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application uses the standard status registers of the R amp S FSW depending on the measurement type Ho
137. e pre defined bands see table 9 4 The mixer settings for the user defined band can be selected freely The frequency range for the user defined band is defined via the harmonics configuration see Range 1 2 on page 52 Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue on page 120 RF Overrange If enabled the frequency range is not restricted by the band limits RF Start and RF Stop In this case the full LO range of the selected harmonics is used Remote command SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe on page 123 Preset Band Restores the presettings for the selected band Note changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function This function allows you to restore the original band settings Remote command SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet on page 120 Mixer Type The External Mixer option supports the following external mixer types 2 Port LO and IF data use the same port 8 Port LO and IF data use separate ports Remote command SENSe MIXer PORTs on page 123 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration The harmonics configuration determines the frequency range for user defined bands see Band on page 52 Range 1 2 Mixer Settings Harmonics Configuration Enables the use of a second range based on another harmonic frequency of the mixer to cover the band s frequency range IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement For each range you can define
138. e second alignment step has been completed successfully a new dialog box is displayed Alignment finished Please reconnect RTO CH1 to FSW IF OUT 2 GHz Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel C em IE m 4 B A LU LEPPEII REF OUT 10 MHz TRIG IN optional In order to switch from alignment mode to measurement mode move the cable from the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE back to the IF OUT 2 GHZ connec tor so that it is then connected to the CH1 input on the oscilloscope If UNCAL is displayed alignment was not yet performed successfully User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 63 5 2 2 2 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement If both alignment steps were performed successfully the date of alignment is indicated Remote commands SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment STEP STATe on page 131 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE on page 131 Output Settings Access INPUT OUTPUT gt Output The R amp S FSW can provide output to special connectors for other devices For details on connectors refer to the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Front Rear Panel View chapters How to provide trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual IF Video Output IF Wide Out Frequency Noise Source Trigger 2 l Input Trigger 3 Input Igiene A A AEEA 64 IF Wide QU roe m
139. easurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application are identical to those in the R amp S FSW base unit Spectrum application SSS Ee ae User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 29 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays El DaO ES 30 PROS UID SB VIV net te e RU x er EEGEN R ERR IER 30 O Mio T 30 Markor Peak ISU m see 30 Diagram Displays a basic level vs frequency or level vs time diagram of the measured data to evaluate the results graphically This is the default evaluation method Which data is displayed in the diagram depends on the Trace settings Scaling for the y axis can be configured Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DIAG see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Result Summary Result summaries provide the results of specific measurement functions in a table for numerical evaluation The contents of the result summary vary depending on the selected measurement function See the description of the individual measurement functions for details 2 Result Summary Channel Bandwidth Offset Power TX1 Ref 1 MHz 0 86 dBm Oft 0 86 dBm Offse ower 000 kHz 79 59 dB 80 34 dB 0 MHz 85 04 dB 83 85 dB Jpper Tip To navigate within long result summary tables simply scroll through the entries with your finger on the touchscreen Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSUM See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Marker Table Displays a table with
140. ects the decimal separator for data exported in ASCII format Parameters lt Separator gt COMMa Uses a comma as decimal separator e g 4 05 POINt Uses a point as decimal separator e g 4 05 RST RST has no effect on the decimal separator Default is POINt Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator Manual operation See Decimal Separator on page 90 FORMat DEXPort GRAPh lt State gt If enabled all traces for the currently selected graphical result display are included in the export file Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 OFF 0 Switches the function off ON 1 Switches the function on RST 0 Manual operation See Export all Traces for Selected Graph on page 90 FORMat DEXPort HEADer lt State gt If enabled additional instrument and measurement settings are included in the header of the export file for result data If disabled only the pure result data from the selected traces and tables is exported Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Include Instrument Measurement Settings on page 90 FORMat DEXPort TRACes Selection This command selects the data to be included in a data export file see MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 203 9 11 Status Registers Parameters lt Selection gt SINGle Only a single trace is selected for export namely the one speci fied by the MMEMory STOR
141. eld or a checksum e Data This part is used to transmit the actual data with different modulations MCS The length of the field varies number of bytes octets e TRN This field is optional and can be appended to all packages It includes beamform ing information see Beamforming on page 34 Golay sequences In radiocommunications training sequences are used for channel estimation Prede fined sequences that are already known to the receiver are transmitted over the chan nel and evaluated by the receiver in order to estimate the channel Complementary Golay sequences are perfectly suited to this task The individual fields in the IEEE 802 11ad signal packages e g the preamble are made up of Golay sequences Each sequence consists of bipolar symbols 1 They are constructed mathematically in order to achieve specific autocorrelation characteris tics Each consists of a complementary pair a and b An additional index contains the length of the sequence For example G 128 and G 128 represent a complementary sequence with a length of 128 In addition four specific G 128 are then logically com bined into G 512 or G 512 The single carrier physical layers SC low power SC and control nominally use a bandwidth of 1760 MHz while the OFDM physical layer uses 1830 47 MHz Beamforming Transmission in the 60 GHz range is subject to greater free space loss than in the 2 4 or 5 GHz range The channel conditions can change dramati
142. ensated for phase drifts on a per symbol basis Parameters State ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example SENS TRAC PHAS ON Manual operation See Phase Tracking on page 78 9 5 5 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe TRACking TIME lt State gt Activates or deactivates the compensation for timing drift If activated the measure ment results are compensated for timing error on a per symbol basis Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 0 Example SENS TRAC TIME ON SENSe see also SENSe commands Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines which data is evaluated in the result display Note that as opposed to manual operation the PPDUs to be analyzed can be defined either by the number of data symbols the number of data bytes or the measurement duration SENSE BURSECOUN iai nece ai aE Cen ee nde ee cute a e ERN e RA RREREER 150 SENS amp IBURSECOUNESTATO iia iori Mate seno eee eta ate nada EA a A a i ee CAPIT I en eve Deed 150 BENSE BURSIS BUG P P 151 SENSE RN KE 151 ISENGe IDEMod FORMat BANahvze GvMols EOUal eene 151 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MAX esses ener 152 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN eeeeeeeeeeeeene nemen 152 SENSe BURSt COUNt Value If the statistic count is enabled see SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe on page 150 the specified number of PPDUs is taken into con
143. ent 5dB RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Example INP ATT 30dB Defines a 30 dB attenuation and decouples the attenuation from the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 70 INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the attenuation to the reference level Thus when the reference level is changed the R amp S FSW determines the signal level for optimal internal data processing and sets the required attenuation accordingly Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation to the reference level Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Attenuation Mode Value on page 70 INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines an electronic attenuation manually Automatic mode must be switched off INP EATT AUTO OFF see INPut EATT AUTO on page 139 If the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt attenuation in dB Range see data sheet Increment 1 dB RST 0 dB OFF Example INP EATT AUTO OFF INP EATT 10 dB Manual operation See Using Electronic Attenuation on page 70 INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command turns automatic selection of the electronic attenuation on and off If on
144. ent bandwidths up to 2 GHz Sample rate Maximum UO bandwidth 10 kHz to 10 GHz proportional up to maximum 2 GHz UO bandwidths for RF input Usable UO bandwidth GHz Activated 2 option B2000 RF Input ile Y B Bw 0 80 fox M d Output sample rate four GHz Fig 4 8 Relationship between maximum usable I Q bandwidth and output sample rate for active R amp S FSW B2000 5 5 2 Display Configuration Configuration Access MODE gt 802 11ad IEEE 802 11ad measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW The default IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement captures the UO data from the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement signal and determines various characteristic signal parameters such as the modulation accuracy channel fre quency response and power gain in just one measurement see chapter 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement on page 13 Other parameters specified in the IEEE 802 11ad standard must be determined in sep arate measurements see chapter 3 2 SEM Measurements on page 28 The settings required to configure each of these measurements are described here ee Ee ls UTC d DEE 44 e IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement sese 44 e SEM lesen 84 Display Configuration Access Overview Display Config or MEAS CONFIG gt Display Config The measurement results can be displayed using vari
145. ent forms of values WC Urne o rere rex tr in aed c eee a ee Pe eb e a d P 107 s BOON i EE 108 e Character Data EE 108 ME e Ee CN 108 e JBISDIPBRLIGSGHIESSRbRERPIERE IHRER HIN HIR d 108 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Instead of a number you can also set numeric values with a text parameter in special cases e MIN MAX Defines the minimum or maximum numeric value that is supported e DEF Defines the default value e UP DOWN Increases or decreases the numeric value by one step The step size depends on the setting In some cases you can customize the step size with a corresponding command Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ
146. ent mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic on page 126 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Bias The bias current which is required to set the mixer to its optimum operating point It corresponds to the short circuit current The bias current can range from 10 mA to 10 mA The actual bias current is lower because of the forward voltage of the mixer diode s Tip You can also define the bias interactively while a preview of the trace with the changed setting is displayed see Bias Settings on page 55 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL BIAS on page 124 Mixer Name Specifies the name of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied This set ting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL MIXer on page 126 Mixer S N Specifies the serial number of the external mixer for which the table is to be applied The specified number is checked against the currently connected mixer number before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber on page 127 Mixer Type Specifies whether the external mixer for which the table is to be applied is a two port or three port type This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Remote command SENSe C
147. epending on the center frequency It is indi cated in this field when the IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used For details on the used frequencies see the data sheet The IF WIDE OUTPUT connector is used automatically instead of the IF VIDEO DEMOD connector if the bandwidth extension hardware option R amp S FSW B160 U160 is activated i e for bandwidths 80 MHz Remote command OUTPut IF IFFRequency on page 134 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of a DUT Remote command DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce on page 134 Trigger 2 3 Defines the usage of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors where Trigger 2 TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connector on the front panel Trigger 3 TRIGGER 3 INPUT OUTPUT connector on the rear panel Trigger 1 is INPUT only Note Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual 5 2 2 3 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Input The signal at the connector is used as an external trigger source by the R amp S FSW Trigger input parameters are available in the Trigger dialog box Output The R amp S FSW sends a trigger signal to the output connector to be used by connected devices Further trigger parameters are available for t
148. es lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Configuring the Result Display Example LAY ADD 1 LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds a new window named 2 with a marker table to the left of window 1 Usage Query only Manual operation See Bitstream on page 19 See Channel Frequency Response on page 20 See Constellation on page 20 See EVM vs Symbol on page 21 See Freq Error vs Symbol on page 21 See Header information on page 22 See Magnitude Capture on page 23 See Phase Error vs Symbol on page 24 See Phase Tracking vs Symbol on page 25 See Power Spectrum on page 25 See PvT Full PPDU on page 26 See PvT Rising Edge on page 26 See PvT Falling Edge on page 27 See Result Summary on page 27 See Diagram on page 30 See Result Summary on page 30 See Marker Table on page 30 See Marker Peak List on page 30 Table 9 6 lt WindowType gt parameter values for 802 11ad application Parameter value Window type Window types for I Q data CFR Channel Frequency Response CONStellation Constellation DBSTream Data Bitstream raw DDBStream Data Bitstream decoded EVSYmbol EVM vs Symbol FEVSymbol Frequency Error vs Symbol HBSTream Header Bitstream raw HDBStream Header Bitstream decoded HEADer Header Info MCAPture Magnitude Capture PEVSymbol Phase Error vs Symbol PTVSymbol
149. evel in the R amp S FSW should be as high as possible but without introducing com pression clipping or overload Provide for early amplification by the preamplifier and a low attenuation Impedance In the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application the impedance is fixed to 50 O and cannot be changed Triggered Measurements 4 5 Triggered Measurements In a basic measurement with default settings the measurement is started immediately However sometimes you want the measurement to start only when a specific condition is fulfilled for example a signal level is exceeded or in certain time intervals For these cases you can define a trigger for the measurement In FFT sweep mode the trigger defines when the data acquisition starts for the FFT conversion An Offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger event in time domain measurements pre trigger offset For complex tasks advanced trigger settings are available e Hysteresis to avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise e Holdoff to define exactly which trigger event will cause the trigger in a jittering sig nal e Tigger Offsek ice ent ee intet iecur ann x tesi Des leds 40 LIMES dori me 40 e Tigger Drop Out TIG ne nee eoim dier er edad teed 41 E Rate le GE 42 4 5 1 Trigger Offset An offset can be defined to delay the measurement after the trigger event or to include data before the actual trigger even
150. external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 203 Trace Export Configuration Export Opens the Traces dialog box to configure the trace and data export settings See chapter 6 2 1 Trace Data Export Configuration on page 89 UO Export Export Opens a file selection dialog box to select an export file to which the IQ data will be stored This function is only available in single sweep mode and only in applications that process UO data such as the UO Analyzer or optional applications How to Export and Import I Q Data Note Secure user mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe on page 201 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1IQ COMMent on page 200 7 2 How to Export and Import I Q Data UO data can only be exported in applications that process I Q data s
151. f large data rates carrier Mbps QPSK SC PHY 16QAM Low 25 to 31 626 2053 BPSK Transmission using battery operated devices power Mbps QPSK SC PHY OFDM 13 to 24 693 6756 SQPSK Very high data rates strong power supply PEE Mbps QPSK Currently not supported by R amp S FSW 802 11ad appli 16QAM cation 64QAM All DMG PHYs use the same package structure but they differ in how the individual fields are defined as well as in the coding and modulation that is used Package structure The general structure of a package in the IEEE 802 11ad physical layer consists of the following common parts Preamble SEH Channel Configurable Optional Training EMEN Training for Field Estimation length Beamforming Fig 4 1 General package structure in IEEE 802 11ad e Preamble The preamble consists of the short training field STF and the channel estima tion CE field It is required in every package It supports the receiver during auto matic gain control AGC when recognizing the package and in estimating the fre quency offset and it displays the type of displays the type of PHY that is used SC or OFDM The receiver can also use the known CE field to estimate the channel Header User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 33 R amp S FSW K95 Measurement Basics The header is different for every PHY and contains additional important information for the receiver such as the modulation mode MCS the length of the data fi
152. fic errors negative error numbers are error messages defined by SCPI If the error queue is empty the error number 0 No error is returned Usage Query only Reading Out the EVENt Part STATus OPERation EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable SYNC EVENt lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the EVENt section of the status register The command also deletes the contents of the EVENt section Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Reading Out the CONDition Part STATus OPERation CONDition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable SYNC CONDition lt ChannelName gt This command reads out the CONDition section of the status register The command does not delete the contents of the EVENt section 9 11 2 4 9 11 2 5 9 11 2 6 Status Registers Query parameters lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Usage Query only Controlling the ENABle Part STATus OPERation ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC ENABle lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the ENABle part of a register The ENABle part allows true conditions in the EVENt par
153. files An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file e g xyz xm1 Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e 1 Q data binary file e g xyz complex float32 Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file inside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file Q preview XSLT file e g open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser A sample stylesheet is available at http www rohde schwarz com file open IqTar xml file in web browser xslt Q Data File Format iq tar A 2 4 I Q Parameter XML File Specification The content of the UO parameter XML file must comply with the XML schema RsIqTar xsd available at http www rohde schwarz com file RslqTar xsd In particular the order of the XML elements must be respected i e iq tar uses an ordered XML schema For your own implementation of the iq tar file format make sure to validate your XML file against the given schema The following example shows an UO parameter XML file The XML elements and attrib utes are explained in the following sections Sample UO parameter XML file xyz xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt
154. firmed CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X Position This command moves a marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis If necessary the command activates the marker If the marker has been used as a delta marker the command turns it into a normal marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that defines the marker position on the x axis Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz Manual operation See Marker Table on page 30 See Marker Peak List on page 30 See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 See X value on page 92 9 10 3 Retrieving Trace Results The following commands describe how to retrieve the trace data from the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement Note that for these measurements only 1 trace per window can be configured The traces for SEM measurements are identical to those in the Spectrum application Retrieving Results Remote commands exclusive to retrieving trace results FORMa DATA 192 Ti snc esa n med a steep Nr po rd i nen 192 TRACE ER NEE 194 RRE le Ee 194 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format that is used for transmission of trace data from the R amp S FSW to the controlling computer Note that the command has no effect for data that you send to the R amp S FSW The R amp S FSW automatically recognizes the data
155. for each band can be selected freely within the overlapping frequency range This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 117 Parameters Frequency numeric value Example MIX ON Activates the external mixer MIX FREQ HAND 78 0299GHz Sets the handover frequency to 78 0299 GHz Manual operation See Handover Freq on page 52 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STARt This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band starts Example MIX FREQ STAR Queries the start frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 51 SENSe MIXer FREQuency STOP This command queries the frequency at which the external mixer band stops Example MIX FREQ STOP Queries the stop frequency of the band Usage Query only Manual operation See RF Start RF Stop on page 51 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND PRESet This command restores the preset frequency ranges for the selected standard wave guide band Note Changes to the band and mixer settings are maintained even after using the PRESET function Use this command to restore the predefined band ranges Example MIX HARM BAND PRES Presets the selected waveguide band Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Band on page 52 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue Band This command select
156. g Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote command MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 203 Markers Access MKR R amp S FSW K95 Analysis Markers help you analyze your measurement results by determining particular values in the diagram Thus you can extract numeric values from a graphical display Markers are configured in the Marker dialog box which is displayed when you do one of the following Individual Marker Settings EE 91 e General Marker SOtllms sesede a ka a dl e c Maine 93 6 3 1 Individual Marker Settings Access MKR gt Marker Config Up to 17 markers or delta markers can be activated for each window simultaneously Markers Ref Marker Marker 1 E E Norm 12 16 Norm Selected State X value Type Link to Marker Trace Norm Norm Se 1 Magnitude Capture gt Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta 91 Selected BEE 92 SIDA LEE 92 STEE 92 ST iino rere 92 Reference Marke 93 Linking to Another MOK ON uc docere citet etd e cte ce ete fec e tte ve cetero ree cies tien 93 Assigning the Marker to Trage cerne eee a Pda 93 MS RTT ETE LT T 93 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta The Marker X softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog box to enter the marker posit
157. gative quadrature offset means a phase angle less than 90 degrees Fig 3 5 Negative quadrature offset 3 1 1 4 EVM Measurement The PPDU EVM direct method evaluates the root mean square EVM over one PPDU That is the square root of the averaged error power normalized by the averaged refer ence power N 1 N 1 3 IX oss n X ref n 3 le n EVM N 1 m CR n Y be n n 0 n 0 Before calculation of the EVM tracking errors in the measured signal are compensated for if specified by the user In the ideal reference signal the tracking errors are always compensated for Tracking errors include phase center frequency error common phase error timing sampling frequency error and gain errors quadrature offset and gain imbalance errors however are not corrected IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement The PPDU EVM is not part of the IEEE standard and no limit check is specified Never theless this commonly used EVM calculation can provide some insight in modulation quality and enables comparisons to other modulation standards Q Fig 3 6 l Q diagram for EVM calculation 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Mea surements Access Overview Display Config or MEAS gt Display Config The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application provides various different methods to evaluate the captured signal without having to start a new measurement or sweep Which results are dis
158. he connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 147 OUTPut TRIGger port DIRection on page 147 Output Type Trigger 2 3 Type of signal to be sent to the output Device Trig Default Sends a trigger when the R amp S FSW triggers gered Trigger Sends a high level trigger when the R amp S FSW is in Ready for trig Armed ger state This state is indicated by a status bit in the STATus OPERation reg ister bit 5 as well as by a low level signal at the AUX port pin 9 User Defined Sends a trigger when user selects Send Trigger button In this case further parameters are available for the output signal Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe on page 147 Level Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines whether a constant high 1 or low 0 signal is sent to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel on page 147 Pulse Length Output Type Trigger 2 3 Defines the length of the pulse sent as a trigger to the output connector Remote command OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe LENGth on page 148 Send Trigger Output Type Trigger 2 3 Sends a user defined trigger to the output connector immediately Note that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected
159. he contents of the file are in 32 bit floating point format Secure User Mode In secure user mode settings that are to be stored on the instrument are stored to vol atile memory which is restricted to 256 MB Thus a Memory full error may occur although the hard disk indicates that storage space is still available To store data permanently select an external storage location such as a USB memory device For details see Protecting Data Using the Secure User Mode in the Data Manage ment section of the R amp S FSW User Manual Parameters 1 lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores the captured UO data to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 96 9 10 7 Exporting Trace Results to an ASCII File Trace results can be exported to an ASCII file for further evaluation in other external applications FORMStUDEXP oft DS EPIO Ira ae re deno ue Rog itor Seane La RERE 202 FORMaUtDEXPOFIEGRXADPLEi natas ua thx eno eoa Fem ena xui cma aa xps duke ea apa see ena ua seas d era TOP dee rk 202 FORMatDEXPOM HEADET ceri ftre outre a De cao aeneus cu pena Ree 202 FORMA DEXPGn TRACES aiia tetro ee tere iN eec du absurde e aont d e bra d a xa 202 MMEMory S Obert ee tie te aeo EERSTEN cR OE eve PI PY YE ed Ye A dada 203 Retrieving Results FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command sel
160. he default IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement captures UO data from the RF Input of the FSW with a bandwidth up to 2 GHz This I Q data is used by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application to demodulate broadband signals and determine vari ous characteristic signal parameters such as modulation accuracy channel frequency response and power Other IEEE 802 11ad specific measurements such as Spectrum Emission Mask can also be performed by sweeping over the desired frequency range using a filter with a smaller measurement bandwidth The advantage of using a smaller bandwidth is an increased signal to noise ratio see chapter 3 2 SEM Measurements on page 28 e Modulation Accuracy Parameters sss nennen nnns 13 e Evaluation Methods for IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurements 18 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters The default IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement captures UO data from the RF input of the R amp S FSW and determines the following UO parameters in a single capture Table 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Result Summary parameters Parameter Description Remote command to query result Modulation Accuracy Parameters EVM AII dB EVM over all symbols in PPDUS to analyze in capture buffer FETCh EVM ALL AVERage on page 188 EVM Data Symbols dB EVM over data symbols in PPDUS to analyze in capture buffer FETCh EVM DATA AVERage on page 188 EVM Pilot Symbols dB EVM ove
161. he reference marker is deactivated the delta marker referring to it is also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 175 Linking to Another Marker Links the current marker to the marker selected from the list of active markers If the x axis value of the inital marker is changed the linked marker follows on the same x position Linking is off by default Using this function you can set two markers on different traces to measure the differ ence e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate n MARKer m LINK TO MARKer m on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 174 Assigning the Marker to a Trace The Trace setting assigns the selected marker to an active trace The trace deter mines which value the marker shows at the marker position If the marker was previ ously assigned to a different trace the marker remains on the previous frequency or time but indicates the value of the new trace If a trace is turned off the assigned markers and marker functions are also deactiva ted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 173 All Markers Off Deactivates all markers in one step Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 172 General Marker Sett
162. i tion Usage Event Positioning Delta Markers The following commands position delta markers on the trace CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz M AimumlEEFT 179 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzMAximumNENT 179 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MAXimum PEAK cesses 179 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mzM Aimum RICH 179 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkermz MiNimum LEET 180 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimumNENT 180 CALOCulate n DELTamarker m MlNimum PEAK eese 180 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz MiNimum RICH 180 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the left of the current marker posi tion Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum NEXT This command moves a marker to the next higher value Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum PEAK This command moves a delta marker to the highest level If the marker is not yet active the command first activates the marker Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MAXimum RIGHt This command moves a delta marker to the next higher value The search includes only measurement values to the right of the current marker posi tion Usage Event Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MINimum LEFT This command moves a delta marker to the next higher minimum value The
163. ible to use compact and competitive antennas or antenna arrays e g for beamforming On the down side this band has a very high free field attenuation and oxygen O2 absorption However because the transmission typically takes place within a limited range of under 10 m the typical living room the high degree of attenuation can also be seen as an advantage Interference from adjacent transmissions is very unlikely The transmission is very difficult to intercept making it even more secure Finally beamforming can be used to focus the power to the receiver Even when the IEEE 802 11ad transmission takes place in the open ISM band inter ference of other applications must be minimized Thus a spectrum mask is defined by the standard which must be adhered to during transmission Therefore an SEM mea surement is provided by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 32 R amp S FSW K95 Measurement Basics Types of PHYs In principle four different types of DMG PHYs are available using different package structures and modulation modes They make it possible to fulfill differing require ments such as high throughput or robustness Table 4 1 PHY types and modulation modes PHY MCS Data rate Modulation Usage type Control 0 27 5 Mbps DBPSK Control messages for connection and monitoring PHY small data rates but must be very robust Single 1 to 12 385 4620 BPSK Robust data transmission o
164. ic eere ce ooa e Fan cla ed a e emer tere irae dus 170 INITiatexn2 SEQuencer IMMediate eese nne rre nnne na 170 NiTIalesm SEQUBDOSEMUODE corra tori men Ca ri ica a tera totu ra trn P ah Le e aris rnc 170 SVS TOM ET EE 171 ABORt This command aborts the measurement in the current measurement channel and resets the trigger system To prevent overlapping execution of the subsequent command before the measure ment has been aborted successfully use the OPC or WAT command after ABOR and before the next command For details see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual To abort a sequence of measurements by the Sequencer use the INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer ABORt command Note on blocked remote control programs If a sequential command cannot be completed for example because a triggered sweep never receives a trigger the remote control program will never finish and the remote channel to the R amp S FSW is blocked for further commands In this case you must inter rupt processing on the remote channel first in order to abort the measurement To do so send a Device Clear command from the control instrument to the R amp S FSW on a parallel channel to clear all currently active remote channels Depend ing on the used interface and protocol send the following commands Visa viClear e GPIB ibcir e RSIB RSDLLibclr Now you can send the ABORt command on the remote channel performi
165. identical to the corresponding measurements in the base unit but it is pre configured according to the requirements of the IEEE 802 11ad standard If you require any other frequency sweep measurements use the Spectrum applica tion For details on frequency sweep measurements see the R amp S FSW User Manual The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM measurement determines the power of the IEEE 802 11ad signal in defined offsets from the carrier and compares the power values with a spectral mask specified by the IEEE 802 11ad specifications The limits depend on the selected bandclass Thus the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emis sions and their distance to the limit be identified The IEEE 802 11ad standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions Ref Level 41 00 dBm Offset 40 00 dB 1 Spectrum Emission Mask CF 2 1 GHz 1001 pts 2 55 MHz Span 25 5 MHz 2 Result Summary W CDMA 3GPP DL Tx Power 33 74 dBm Tx Bandwidth 3 840 MHz RBW 1 000 MHz Range Up Frequency Power Abs Power Rel ALimit z Hz 2 09153 GHz 39 37 dBm 39 75 dBm 2 10439 GHz 38 64 dBm 72 37 dB 21 87 dB 2 11026 GHz 39 24 dBm 72 97dB_ 18 47 dB Fig 3 13 SEM measurement results Remote commands SENSe SWEep MODE on page 114 Querying results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL on page 190 TRAC DATA LIST See TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 192 Evaluation methods The evaluation methods for SEM m
166. in three master PPDUs The three master PPDUs relate to the minimum maximum and average values across all complete PPDUs This data is returned in dBm values on a per sample basis Each Retrieving Results sample relates to an analysis of each corresponding sample within each processed PPDU For PVT Rising and PVT Falling displays the results are restricted to the rising or fall ing edge of the analyzed PPDUs The type of PVT data returned is determined by the TRACE number passed as an argument to the SCPI command TRACE1 minimum PPDU data values TRACE2 mean PPDU data values TRACE3 maximum PPDU data values Supported data formats see FORMat DATA on page 192 ASCii REAL 9 10 4 11 Channel Frequency Response The Channel Frequency Response evaluation returns absolute power values per car rier Two trace types are provided for this evaluation Table 9 9 Query parameter and results for Channel Frequency Response TRACE1 All channel frequency response values per channel TRACE2 An average channel frequency response value for each of the 53 or 57 117 within the IEEE 802 11 n standard carriers Absolute power results are returned in dB Supported data formats FORMat DATA ASCii REAL 9 10 5 Retrieving Marker Results The following commands are required to retrieve marker results Useful commands for retrieving marker results described elsewhere CALCulate lt n gt DELTama
167. ings Access MKR gt Marker Config gt Marker Settings Markers Markers Marker Settings Marker Table Marker Info Marker Table DBHI cnin Rr Dr oaa redi ner Hb redes aaaladent hase aes 94 Marker Table Display Defines how the marker information is displayed On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Displays the marker information within the diagram area Auto Default Up to two markers are displayed in the diagram area If more markers are active the marker table is displayed automatically Remote command DISPlay MTAB1le on page 176 fg Oss Import Export Functions IO Data Import and Export Baseband signals mostly occur as so called complex baseband signals i e a signal representation that consists of two channels the in phase lI and the quadrature Q channel Such signals are referred to as I Q signals The complete modulation informa tion and even distortion that originates from the RF IF or baseband domains can be analyzed in the UO baseband Importing and exporting UO signals is useful for various applications Generating and saving UO signals in an RF or baseband signal generator or in external software tools to analyze them with the R amp S FSW later e Capturing and saving UO signals with an RF or baseband signal analyzer to ana lyze them with the R amp S FSW or an external software tool later For example you can capture UO
168. ion X value Pressing the softkey again deactivates the selected marker pum PED IN CN CECI ANN NN UU SR User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 91 Markers Marker 1 is always the default reference marker for relative measurements If activa ted markers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Type function Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Mkr Type softkey switches on an additional delta marker 1 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 174 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 199 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 175 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 176 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 198 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 199 Selected Marker Marker name The marker which is currently selected for editing is highlighted orange Remote command Marker selected via suffix m in remote commands Marker State Activates or deactivates the marker in the diagram Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 175 X value Defines the position of the marker on the x axis Note Setting markers in Parameter Trend Displays In Parameter T
169. ion PPDUS Status Dar tice idest te aine e eras Status registers COMICS coss e e pter Neale 204 IEEE 802 11ad 204 Querying 204 STAT QUES POW zs 115 STATus QUEStionable SYNC sssessss 204 Suffixes COMMON iocur ti der ee ttd ED cts 103 Remote command Sinissaar 105 Swap UO EE ET 141 Sweep ee ur ue RE 79 80 Configuration SORKECY 2 rent nete 79 COUNT es Time remote Symbols Count remote EE 185 T TIMING error tracking c aee rin me ennt etie bs orones 150 Traces Configuration softkey sssssee 88 Configuring remote control 180 E ee del E 90 Exporting 89 90 96 Mode remote etcetera cna oit EES 180 Querying e cea ta rota sie rtt etta io oben 18 Results LEIT e maginn eee 191 Settings remote control A 180 Tracking Level errors 78 149 Phase drift 78 149 Remote COMON iier tre terae 149 dl te BT 150 Trigger Configuration remote sesse 142 Configuration softkey Daer T lee E o Drop Out Time 41 External FEMOtE iecore nte tnnt 145 TOMS ep 42 76 Hysteresis cio pnis nene reset RR dadas epe d 40 76 Measurements ucc 40 76 jog Er 65 76 Slope 76 145 Bet Giel tem een xD quere tur Le ER ex oet 75 External trigger remote 144 VQ Power remote A 144 IF Powe
170. ion for the currently displayed measurement channel is updated Remote command INITiate lt n gt IMMediate on page 169 Continue Single Sweep After triggering repeats the number of sweeps set in Sweep Count without deleting the trace of the last measurement While the measurement is running the Continue Single Sweep softkey and the RUN SINGLE key are highlighted The running measurement can be aborted by selecting the highlighted softkey or key again Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer If the capture time is too short demodulation will fail Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 142 Sweep Average Count Defines the number of measurements to be performed in the single sweep mode Val ues from 0 to 200000 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one measurement is performed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 182 5 2 8 Result Configuration Access Overview 2 Result Config or MEAS CONFIG gt Result Config Some evaluation methods require or allow for additional settings to configure the result display Note that the available settings depend on the selected window see Specifics for on page 47 e Table Configuration cie drei tei e rd re tei e oie ca dus 80 UE cS 81 el E 82 5 2 8 1 Table Configuration Access Overview gt Result Config gt Table Config R amp S FSW K95 Configuration or
171. irst range Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example MIX LOSS TABL mix 1 4 Specifies the conversion loss table mix_1_4 Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 53 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW Average This command defines the average conversion loss to be used for the entire low first range Parameters Average numeric value Range 0 to 100 RST 24 0 dB Default unit dB Example MIX LOSS 20dB Manual operation See Conversion loss on page 53 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe MIXer PORTSs lt PortType gt This command specifies whether the mixer is a 2 port or 3 port type Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example MIX PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 52 SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe lt State gt If enabled the band limits are extended beyond RF Start and RF Stop due to the capabilities of the used harmonics Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Manual operation See RF Overrange on page 52 Conversion Loss Table Settings The following settings are required to configure and manage conversion loss tables I SENSeTCORRScion C TEE 123 SENSe ICORR amp ction CVUL BJA uir tecia lt reuel iie tna denuo e Ea AREE ARN VAR UDE DRUSI EE TTA 124 SENSeJCORRectionm CVEICATAIOg E 124 ISENSeTGORRScUOI GO EE 124 SENSe CORRection CVL COMMAnt 221i 11e da dee
172. is command returns the average maximum or minimum gain imbalance for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh IQOFfset AVERage FETCh IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh IQOFfset MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum UO offset for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh QUADerror AVERage FETCh QUADerror MAXimum FETCh QUADerror MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum quadrature error for the PPDU in degrees For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh RTIMe AVERage FETCh RTIMe MAXimum FETCh RTIMe MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum rise time for the PPDU in s For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only 9 10 2 Retrieving Results FETCh SYMBolerror AVERage FETCh SYMBolerror MAXimum FETCh SYMBolerror MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum symbol clock error for the PPDu in ppm For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh TDPower AVERage FETCh TDPower MAXimum FETCh TDPower MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum time domain power for the PPDU in dBm For details see chap
173. l You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSW8 or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 dB Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 141 INPut GAIN VALue on page 140 5 2 3 Data Acquisition Access Overview gt Data Acquisition or MEAS CONFIG gt Data Acquisition You can define how much and how data is captured from the input signal 5 2 4 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement quisition Signal Capture Sample Rate Meas Time Swap I Q SE sd c i RR NE 72 ENEE e T 72 SUCI n M 72 Sample Rate This is the sample rate the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application expects the UO input data to have For standard IEEE 802 11ad measurements a sample rate of 2 64 MHz is used The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application does not resample the data To measure signals with a sample rate other than the standard 2 64 MHz for IEEE 802 11ad signals change this setting Remote command TRACe IQ SRATe on page 142 Capture Time Specifies the duration and therefore the amount of data to be captured in the capture buffer If the captu
174. l channels for the same application The number of channels that can be configured at the same time depends on the avail able memory on the instrument Only one measurement can be performed at any time namely the one in the currently active channel However in order to perform the configured measurements consecu tively a Sequencer function is provided If activated the measurements configured in the currently active channels are per formed one after the other in the order of the tabs The currently active measurement is indicated by a amp symbol in the tab label The result displays of the individual channels are updated in the tabs including the MultiView as the measurements are per formed Sequential operation itself is independant of the currently displayed tab For details on the Sequencer function see the R amp S FSW User Manual R amp S FSW K95 Welcome to the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 2 2 Understanding the Display Information The following figure shows a measurement diagram during analyzer operation All information areas are labeled They are explained in more detail in the following sec tions MultiView SS Spectrum WiGig Ref Level n MCS Index 10 Meas Time Samples 0 05 No of Data Symbols 5 Channel Frequency Response 0 0 4 50 0 per F 21 5 GHZ 264 0 MHz Span 2 64 Griz 2 Constellation 7 Header Information DMG PHY MCS Length Training HES a Type Alst Length 1 Channel bar for firmware
175. le measurements see chapter 3 Measurements and Result Dis plays on page 13 The IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement captures the UO data from the ED IEEE 802 11ad signal using a nearly rectangular filter with a relatively large band width This measurement is selected when the IEEE 802 11ad measurement channel is activated The commands to select a different measurement or return to the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement are described here Note that the CONF BURS ResultType IMM commands change the screen layout to display the Magnitude Capture buffer in window 1 at the top of the screen and the selected result type in window 2 below that Any other active windows are closed Use the LAYout commands to change the display see chapter 9 7 Configuring the Result Display on page 155 e Selecting the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 113 e Selecting a Common RF Measurement for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 114 9 4 1 Selecting the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Any of the following commands can be used to return to the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement Each of these results are automatically determined when the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement is performed Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 9 4 2 Selecting a Common RF Measurement for IEEE 802 11ad Signals The following commands are required
176. le sweep mode Analysis Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Aver age Count determines the number of averaging procedures MAXHold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis played The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace mem ory only if the new value is greater than the previous one MINHold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSW saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one VIEW The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and dis played BLANk Hides the selected trace RST Trace 1 WRITe Trace 2 6 BLANk Example INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE WRIT Selects clear write mode for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the measure ment DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe State This command turns a trace on and off The measurement continues in the background Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 for TRACe1 0 for TRACe 2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON Usage SCPI confirmed 9 9 3 9 9 3 1 Analysis SENSe SWEep POINts lt Points gt Sets queries the number of trace points to be di
177. ling settings represent the frontend of the mea surement setup 5 2 2 1 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement For more information on the use and effects of these settings see chapter 4 4 Pre paring the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters on page 39 e Juputboource SONS ooi oorr vr eene eb egeg ve tee dre aene voee b egeret e eter e e nes 48 E ell Tt e E 64 e Fregusncy Setuligs ceto ber aee o eu Ead ED dade aia 66 e Amplitude Seuss eee eer ee err rera rtt ci gc ace Bene h ERR DL ER Kod EE 68 Input Source Settings Access Overview 2 Input Frontend gt Input Source Config or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config The input source determines which data the R amp S FSW will analyze e Radio Frequency Input ooi reete aren th rk paa ka Re eee 48 e Settings for Input from UO Data File 49 e External Mixer Gettings nennen nnne nns 50 e Settings for 2 GHz Bandwidth Extension R amp S FSW B2000 60 Radio Frequency Input Access Overview 2 Input Frontend gt Input Source Config gt Radio Frequency or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt Radio Frequency The default input source for the R amp S FSW is Radio Frequency i e the signal at the RF INPUT connector of the R amp S FSW If no additional options are installed this is the only available input source Input Frontend C Input Source Frequency Ampli
178. lowing commands are required to configure general window layout independent of the application Note that the suffix n always refers to the window in the currently selected measure ment channel see INSTrument SELect on page 112 prelio 156 DISPlay WVUN Dawei SIZE EE 156 DISPlay FORMat lt Format gt This command determines which tab is displayed Parameters lt Format gt SPLit Displays the MultiView tab with an overview of all active chan nels SINGIe Displays the measurement channel that was previously focused RST SING Example DISP FORM SPL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE Size This command maximizes the size of the selected result display window temporarily To change the size of several windows on the screen permanently use the LAY SPL command see LAYout SPLitter on page 160 Parameters Size LARGe Maximizes the selected window to full screen Other windows are still active in the background SMALI Reduces the size of the selected window to its original size If more than one measurement window was displayed originally these are visible again RST SMALI 9 7 2 Configuring the Result Display Example DISP WIND2 LARG Working with Windows in the Display The following commands are required to change the evaluation type and rearrange the screen layout for a measurement channel as you do using the SmartGrid in manual operation Since the available evalua
179. ly INSTrument SELect lt ChannelType gt lt ChannelName gt This command activates a new measurement channel with the defined channel type or selects an existing measurement channel with the specified name See also INSTrument CREate NEW on page 109 For a list of available channel types see INSTrument LIST on page 110 Parameters lt ChannelType gt Channel type of the new channel For a list of available channel types see table 9 3 WIGIG 802 11ad option R amp S FSW K95 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel Example INST WIGIG Activates a measurement channel for the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application INST 802 11ad Selects the measurement channel named 802 11ad for exam ple before executing further commands for that channel Selecting a Measurement SYSTem PRESet CHANnel EXECute This command restores the default instrument settings in the current channel Use INST SEL to select the channel Example INST Spectrum2 Selects the channel for Spectrum2 SYST PRES CHAN EXEC Restores the factory default settings to the Spectrum2 channel Usage Event Manual operation See Preset Channel on page 47 9 4 Selecting a Measurement The following commands are required to define the measurement type in a remote environment The selected measurement must be started explicitely see chapter 9 8 Starting a Measurement on page 167 For details on availab
180. mary The result summary provides measurement results based on the complete captured signal User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 27 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays 3 2 3 Result Summary PPDUs EVM All dB Error Hz Error ppm Fig 3 12 Result summary Note You can configure which results are displayed see chapter 5 2 8 1 Table Con figuration on page 80 However the results are always calculated regardless of their visibility For details on the individual results and the summarized values see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH RSGL see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results FETCh BURSt ALL on page 187 SEM Measurements Access Overview gt Select Measurement gt SEM or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt SEM In addition to the default IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement which captures UO data from the RF Input of the FSW with a bandwidth up to 2 GHz the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application also provides an SEM measurement The SEM mea surement sweeps over the desired frequency range using a filter with a smaller mea surement bandwidth The advantage of using a smaller bandwidth is an increased sig nal to noise ratio User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 28 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays R ee Se eee The SEM measurement provided by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application is
181. measurement Thus you can easily configure an entire measurement channel from input over processing to output and analysis by stepping through the dialog boxes as indicated in the Overview The available settings and functions in the Overview vary depending on the currently selected measurement For SEM measurements see chapter 3 2 SEM Measure ments on page 28 For the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurement the Overview provides quick access to the following configuration dialog boxes listed in the recommended order of processing 1 Select Measurement See Select Measurement on page 47 2 Input Frontend See chapter 5 2 2 Input Output and Frontend Settings on page 47 3 Data Acquisition See chapter 5 2 3 Data Acquisition on page 71 4 Tracking See chapter 5 2 5 Tracking on page 78 5 Evaluation Range See chapter 6 1 Evaluation Range on page 87 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 46 5 2 2 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 6 Display Configuration See chapter 5 1 Display Configuration on page 44 To configure settings P Select any button in the Overview to open the corresponding dialog box Preset Channel Select the Preset Channel button in the lower lefthand corner of the Overview to restore all measurement settings in the current channel to their default values Note that the PRESET key restores the entire instrument to its default values and thus
182. message indicating the allowed input frequencies is displayed in the status bar A Trigger Offset Trigger Polarity and Trigger Holdoff to improve the trigger stabil ity can be defined for the RF trigger but no Hysteresis Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 UO Power Trigger Source Trigger Source This trigger source is not available if the optional Digital Baseband Interface or optional Analog Baseband Interface is used for input It is also not available for analysis band widths 2 160 MHz Triggers the measurement when the magnitude of the sampled UO data exceeds the trigger threshold Remote command TRIG SOUR IQP see TRIGger SEQuence SOURce on page 145 Trigger Level Trigger Source Defines the trigger level for the specified trigger source IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement For details on supported trigger levels see the data sheet Remote command TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 144 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel IQPower on page 144 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel EXTernal port on page 144 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel RFPower on page 145 Drop Out Time Trigger Source Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again Remote command TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe on page 143 Trigger Offset Trigger Source Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement
183. mind the actual power level the R amp S FSW must handle and not to rely on the displayed reference level internal reference level displayed reference level offset Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 138 Unit Reference Level The R amp S FSW measures the signal voltage at the RF input The following units are available and directly convertible dBm dBmV dByV dBpA dBpW Volt Ampere Watt Remote command CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 164 Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level Reference Level Automatically determines a reference level which ensures that no overload occurs at the R amp S FSW for the current input data At the same time the internal attenuators and the preamplifier for analog baseband input the full scale level are adjusted so the sig nal to noise ratio is optimized while signal compression and clipping are minimized To determine the required reference level a level measurement is performed on the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K95 Configuration If necessary you can optimize the reference level further by manually decreasing the attenuation level to the lowest possible value before an overload occurs then decreas ing the reference level in the same way Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 153 RF Attenuation Defines the attenuation applied to the RF input of the R amp S FSW Attenuation Mo
184. mp S FSW the R amp S FSW can use a signal from an external device as a trigger to capture data Alter natively the internal trigger signal used by the R amp S FSW can be output for use by other connected devices Using the same trigger on several devices is useful to syn chronize the transmitted and received signals within a measurement For details on the connectors see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual External trigger as input If the trigger signal for the R amp S FSW is provided by an external device the trigger sig nal source must be connected to the R amp S FSW and the trigger source must be defined as External for the R amp S FSW Trigger output The R amp S FSW can provide output to another device either to pass on the internal trig ger signal or to indicate that the R amp S FSW itself is ready to trigger The trigger signal can be output by the R amp S FSW automatically or manually by the user If itis provided automatically a high signal is output when the R amp S FSW has trig gered due to a measurement start Device Triggered or when the R amp S FSW is ready to receive a trigger signal after a measurement start Trigger Armed User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 38 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters Manual triggering If the trigger output signal is initiated manually the length and level high low of the trigger pulse is also user definable Note however
185. n repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSW by replacing modules Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified func tions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corre sponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The most recent release notes are also available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz website on the R amp S FSW product page at http www rohde schwarz com product FSW htm gt Downloads gt Firmware Application Notes Application notes application cards white papers and educational notes are further publications that provide more comprehensive descriptions and background informa tion The latest versions are available for download from the Rohde amp Schwarz web site at www rohde schwarz com appnote Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as ments dialog boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quotation marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by
186. n page 78 4 EVM vs Symbol 1 Clrw 23232 sym Vertical lines indicate the start of the next PPDU The numbers at the bottom of the lines indicate the corresponding symbol positions Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH EVSY see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 3 EVM vs Symbol on page 196 Freq Error vs Symbol Displays the frequency error values per analyzed symbol in the PPDU User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 21 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays O UO EEN 2 Freq Error vs Symbol Bel 23232 sym Vertical lines indicate the start of the next PPDU The numbers at the bottom of the lines indicate the corresponding symbol positions Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH FEVS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 or Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 4 Frequency Error vs Symbol on page 196 Header information Displays information that has been decoded from the headers of the PPDUs The header contains information on the modulation used for transmission 3 Header Information DMG PHY MCS Length Training HCS Type Alst Length 1000 1111000100110100 2345 0 0x0010110010001111 1111000001011000 0x0001 101000001111 0100011110100110 0x0110010111100010 0100100010010001 0x1000100100010010 1010 1011100110110110 1ANNN N NANI ANAT d 00443104 The header information is provided as a decoded bit se
187. n rn 70 Errors Genter He 13 au aoi 17 Gain imbalance 13 15 UO offset 2 13 15 o Bp M 68 Phase drift usce i eegene 78 149 PPDU levels ciet re t Recens 78 149 Quadrature phase angle OI 16 Quadrature offset Status bits oh Symbol ilg E Evaluation methods IEEE 80241 add aeina e eerte imt 18 REMOTE e 157 Demum C mr 195 Evaluation range REMOTE aici cence 150 Result displays reperies i 87 SONG S esr ETE E 87 EVM Calculating IEEE 802 11ad viimsi ica 17 em Ee LEE 18 vs symbol result display vs symbol trace data asin Exclude LO nj cs aN EA 177 Exporting BI 96 VQ data 47 95 96 97 215 UC data remote ret eec te Deren 200 Measurement settings ee a eerie neni 90 UE 96 WAGES c 89 90 96 External Mixer Activating remote control Bard iion tust Basic settings nennen eremi ee rrt Config ation sireisas iiai ireid Conversion loss Conversion loss tables Frequency range Handover frequency Harmonic Order Se a Ionio a ek ET MED d EE Programming example b inp FRESLOFING DANS wists eicit ertet rentrer RF overrange RF Start RF Stop Serial number Type eet External trigger Level remote ene me er trenes F FF
188. n window 2 Query only See Bitstream on page 19 See Channel Frequency Response on page 20 See Constellation on page 20 See EVM vs Symbol on page 21 See Freq Error vs Symbol on page 21 See Header information on page 22 See Magnitude Capture on page 23 See Phase Error vs Symbol on page 24 See Phase Tracking vs Symbol on page 25 See Power Spectrum on page 25 See PvT Full PPDU on page 26 See PvT Rising Edge on page 26 See PvT Falling Edge on page 27 Table 9 7 Return values for TRACE1 to TRACE6 parameter For UO data traces the results depend on the evaluation method window type selected for the current window see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 The results for the various window types are descri bed in chapter 9 10 4 Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt on page 195 For RF data traces the trace data consists of a list of 1001 power levels that have been measured The unit depends on the measurement and on the unit you have currently set For SEM measurements the x values should be queried as well as they are not equi distant see TRACe lt n gt DATA X on page 194 Retrieving Results Table 9 8 Return values for LIST parameter This parameter is only available for SEM measurements For each sweep list range you have defined range 1 n the command returns eight values in the follow ing order lt No gt lt StartFreq gt lt St
189. ncer State This command turns the Sequencer on and off The Sequencer must be active before any other Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are executed otherwise an error will occur Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 The Sequencer is activated and a sequential measurement is started immediately OFF 0 The Sequencer is deactivated Any running sequential measure ments are stopped Further Sequencer commands INIT SEQ are not available RST 0 Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single Sequencer mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYST SEQ OFF 9 9 Analysis Analysis The following commands define general result analysis settings concerning the traces and markers in standard IEEE 802 11ad measurements Currently only one Clear Write trace and one marker are available for standard IEEE 802 11ad measurements d 9 9 1 9 9 1 1 Analysis for RF measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application For details see the General Measurement Analysis and Display chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Working NEE 172 e Co
190. nd gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conver sion Loss Table or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Conversion Loss Table In this tab you configure and manage conversion loss tables Conversion loss tables consist of value pairs that describe the correction values for conversion loss at certain IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement frequencies The correction values for frequencies between the reference points are obtained via interpolation The currently selected table for each range is displayed at the top of the dialog box All conversion loss tables found in the instrument s C r_s instr user cv1 direc tory are listed in the Modify Tables list on deeem Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Now KT 56 16 eB 0 eee R 56 Delete Ta RENE 57 Import glo ERES 57 New Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to configure a new conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Tables on page 57 Remote command SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 Edit Table Opens the Edit Conversion loss table dialog box to edit the selected conversion loss table For details on table configuration see Creating and Editing Conversion Loss Ta
191. ner 143 TRIGger SEQuence L EVelEEXTernal port 2 2 a lai leere eee beau nado KENNEN 144 KREE e EE EE 144 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement TRiGgen SEOuence EEVel IO POWSI Ss caeci itnebs ose Sie Lae aes oru derat nene aen 144 qTRIGger SEQuence LEY CUR FR OWE iet ar ott tert ERR E re sce odo xe ee NE 145 TRiGgeniSEQuence SLOP ps 145 RRE E Re DEE 145 TRIGger SEQuence TIME RINTerval 22 2 2 2222 aa aa 146 TRIGger SEQuence DTIMe lt DropoutTime gt Defines the time the input signal must stay below the trigger level before a trigger is detected again Parameters lt DropoutTime gt Dropout time of the trigger Range O sto 10 0s RST Os Manual operation See Drop Out Time on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff TIME Offset Defines the time offset between the trigger event and the start of the measurement Parameters Offset RST 0s Example TRIG HOLD 500us Manual operation See Trigger Offset on page 76 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff Period This command defines the holding time before the next trigger event Note that this command can be used for any trigger source not just IF Power despite the legacy keyword Parameters Period Range Os to 10s RST 0s Example TRIG SOUR EXT Sets an external trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Manual operation See Trigger Holdoff on page 76 TRIGger
192. nfiguring Standard TEaies cereo end eua dee e d e coa 180 e ZOOMING IMO RE 182 Working with Markers e Individual Marker Seti lits ce cr edd cr c edt e e soc d P Dd 172 General Marker Settings nre i annecissanceris teeta daar tre ut sedis 176 e Configuring and Performing a Marker Gearch 177 e Positioflng tlie MaIRBI ore erben tht enenatis une eer Ra tenete De ea dde dug 177 Individual Marker Settings E e HIE MARKET SMA AOF EE 172 CAL Culate nz M Abker mz LUNKTOMAbRkercmz 173 CALOCulate n MARKer m STATe essere hr hrh enitn nnns 173 CAL Culate nz M bkercmz TR ACe 173 GALCulatesmsMARKeESIISQR EE 174 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarker mb AOFF 1 2 2 rerit e e aai a iis a Sa Sa 174 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzUNk 174 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK TOMAhkercmz 174 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREFP cccccescccessscecessececesceseeeseeceeeceeeageeeeseeeseaeeees 175 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzfSTATel ne eseseeeeorororsrersrrrnrnrnrnrnrerennrtterteerereeees 175 CALCulate nz DEL Tamarkercmz TR ACe 175 CAL Culatesms DELTamarkersmisoX E 176 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command turns all markers off Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event Analysis Manual operation See All Markers Off on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK TO MARKer lt m gt lt State gt This comman
193. ng point data IEEE 754 float64 64 bit floating point data IEEE 754 ScalingFactor Optional describes how the binary data can be transformed into values in the unit Volt The binary UO data itself has no unit To get an UO sample in the unit Volt the saved samples have to be multiplied by the value of the ScalingFactor For polar data only the magnitude value has to be multiplied For multi channel signals the ScalingFactor must be applied to all channels The attribute unit must be set to v The ScalingFactor must be gt 0 If the ScalingFactor element is not defined a value of 1 V is assumed NumberOfChan nels Optional specifies the number of channels e g of a MIMO signal contained in the UO data binary file For multi channels the UO samples of the channels are expected to be interleaved within the UO data file see chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 215 If the NumberOfChannels element is not defined one channel is assumed DataFilename Contains the filename of the UO data binary file that is part of the iq tar file It is recommended that the filename uses the following convention lt xyz gt lt Format gt lt Channels gt ch lt Type gt e xyz a valid Windows file name e Format complex polar or real see Format element e Channels Number of channels see NumberOfChannels element e Type float32 float64 int8 int16 int32 or int64 see DataType element
194. ng the mea surement Example ABOR INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and immediately starts a new one Example ABOR WAI INIT IMM Aborts the current measurement and starts a new one once abortion has been completed Usage Event SCPI confirmed CALCulate n BURSt IMMediate This command forces the IQ measurement results to be recalculated according to the current settings Starting a Measurement INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command controls the measurement mode for an individual measurement chan nel Note that in single measurement mode you can synchronize to the end of the mea surement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous measurement mode synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous measurement mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single measurement end synchronization For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual If the measurement mode is changed for a measurement channel while the Sequencer is active see INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer IMMediate on page 170 the mode is only considered the next time the measurement in that channel is activated by the Sequencer Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 ON 1 Continuous measurement OFF 0 Single measurement RST 1 Exampl
195. nge 2ms to 5000s RST 1 0s TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The measurement starts every 50 s Configuring the Trigger Output The following commands are required to send the trigger signal to one of the variable TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement OUTPUETRIGCder RE EE 147 OUTPUE TRIGGER pore LEVEL exec corr East 147 QUTPut TRIGgereport OTYP3 amp iiie edere kree ener ek enun enne ch no Loan enne Rn ha sa se e E aeaiiai 147 OUDTPut TRIGger pornt PULSe1MMediate 4 uo o ener raa etas traen NEE EEN uere 148 OUTPut TRIGger sport PULSe ENGth 2 REENEN cercate ern AER 148 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt DIRection Direction This command selects the trigger direction for trigger ports that serve as an input as well as an output Suffix port Selects the used trigger port 2 trigger port 2 front panel 3 trigger port 3 rear panel Parameters Direction INPut Port works as an input OUTPut Port works as an output RST INPut Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 65 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel Level This command defines the level of the signal generated at the trigger output This command works only if you have selected a user defined output with oUT Put TRIGQgereporto OTYPe Suffix port Selects the trigger port to which
196. nn e 166 DISPlay WINDow n TRACest Y SCALe RVALue esent nnne nnns 166 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MAXimum esee 167 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RVALue MlNimum een 167 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe UNIT DISPlay WINDowsn TRRAGestP ES DATO iuter ttt netter tet rrt DISPIaAVE WINDOW ele EE DlSblavWiNDow nzt ZOOMMUL Tple zo0omz AREA nen enne 183 DISPIay iWINDow lt n gt ZOOM MULTipleszoom gt STATE enne nennen 184 RIES E Re Ee REN 183 EXPont WAV efor DIS lay EE 130 al ee EE 187 EETGIE B RSECOUNE i certet tinto tieniti etie rtp dente t obe Caen rnin Fe eet os 185 e Re EE 185 FETGIEBURSES RE 185 FETCh CFACtor AVERage n id sdpeuneiere dum Mu FETCIECEAGtOEMINITUTIT ectetur eee one Prec ettet PC tet n tr eee dede 188 FETCH GRERMOGAVERAQG fit icis aeree nett oio tait ED Po dicia ir D eve EIL eo pd eL UA 188 e LE E tee iu H 188 FET RE ere le an KEE 188 FETGMEVM ALE AVERIQE V e ates tite eege 188 FETCh EVM ALL MAXimum 188 FETCMEVMALEMINIMON GE 188 FETGMEVM DATA AVERAGE itti cen ER e eterne ge D ee v naan ited 188 FETCHEVM DATA MAXIMUIN 188 FETCMEVM DATA MINIMUM Z cct eere cene mee tpa ne ttr cett c tte eee 188 EETGICEVM PIEOEAVERGSg8T EE 188 FETCH EVM PILOt ep
197. nsition from the top to the base level This is the difference between the time at which the PPDU drops below the upper 90 and lower 10 thresholds FETCh FTIMe AVERage on page 189 Time Skew s A constant time difference between the and Q data for example due to differ ent cable lengths FETCh TSKew AVERage on page 190 Power Parameters Time Domain Power dBm Power of the captured signal vs time FETCh TDPower AVERage on page 190 Crest factor dB The ratio of the peak power to the mean power of the signal also called Peak to Average Power Ratio PAPR FETCh CFACtor AVERage on page 188 The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application also performs statistical evaluation over several PPDUS and displays the following results 3 1 1 1 3 1 1 2 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Table 3 2 Calculated summary results Result type Description Min Minimum value in current capture buffer Average Average value in current capture buffer Max Maximum value in current capture buffer UO Offset An UO offset indicates a carrier offset with fixed amplitude This results in a constant shift of the UO axes The offset is normalized by the mean symbol power and displayed in dB a de de 42 do 02 da ab oa rs drehen Fig 3 1 I Q offset in a vector diagram Gain Imbalance An ideal UO modulator amplifies the and Q signal path by exactly the same degree The imbal
198. nsmitted bit has the highest significance and the last transmitted bit has the lowest significance Magnitude Capture Returns the magnitude for each measurement point as measured over the complete capture period The number of measurement points depends on the input sample rate and the capture time see Sample Rate on page 72 and Capture Time on page 72 Phase Error vs Symbol Phase error value as calculated for each symbol over the complete capture period The number of values is lt No of symbols gt lt No of PPDUs gt Each offset value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of degrees Phase Tracking vs Symbol Returns the average phase tracking result for each symbol over the complete capture period The number of values is lt No of symbols gt lt No of PPDUs gt Each value is returned as a floating point number expressed in units of degrees Power Spectrum Returns the power vs frequency values obtained from the FFT This is an exhaustive call due to the fact that there are nearly always more FFT points than UO samples The number of FFT points is a power of 2 that is higher than the total number of UO samples i e number of FFT points round number of I Q samples to next power of 2 E g if there were 20000 samples then 32768 FFT points are returned Data is returned in floating point format in dBm Power vs Time PVT All complete PPDUs within the capture time are analyzed
199. nt measurement data and is in turn overwritten by a new measurement Instead the stored UO data remains available as input for any number of subsequent measurements Furthermore the temporary data import requires the current mea surement settings in the current application to match the settings that were applied when the measurement results were stored possibly in a different application When the data is used as an input source however the data acquisition settings in the cur rent application attenuation center frequency measurement bandwidth sample rate can be ignored As a result these settings cannot be changed in the current applica tion Only the measurement time can be decreased in order to perform measurements on an extract of the available data from the beginning of the file only When using input from an UO data file the RUN SINGLE function starts a single mea surement i e analysis of the stored UO data while the RUN CONT function repeat edly analyzes the same data from the file Sample iq tar files If you have the optional R amp S FSW VSA application R amp S FSW K70 some sample iq tar files are provided in the C R_S Instr user vsa DemoSignals directory on the R amp S FSW Pre trigger and post trigger samples In applications that use pre triggers or post triggers if no pre trigger or post trigger samples are specified in the UO data file or too few trigger samples are provided to satisfy the requirements
200. ntial measurements Usage Event INITiate lt n gt SEQuencer MODE Mode This command selects the way the R amp S FSW application performs measurements sequentially Before this command can be executed the Sequencer must be activated see SYSTem SEQuencer on page 171 A detailed programming example is provided in the Operating Modes chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note In order to synchronize to the end of a sequential measurement using OPC OPC or WAI you must use SING1e Sequence mode For details on synchronization see the Remote Basics chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual Suffix n irrelevant Starting a Measurement Parameters lt Mode gt SINGIe Each measurement is performed once regardless of the chan nel s sweep mode considering each channels sweep count until all measurements in all active channels have been per formed CONTinuous The measurements in each active channel are performed one after the other repeatedly regardless of the channel s sweep mode in the same order until the Sequencer is stopped CDEFined First a single sequence is performed Then only those channels in continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON are repeated RST CONTinuous Example SYST SEQ ON Activates the Sequencer INIT SEQ MODE SING Sets single sequence mode so each active measurement will be performed once INIT SEQ IMM Starts the sequential measurements SYSTem SEQue
201. nual operation See Capture Time on page 72 TRACe IQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt Parameters lt SampleRate gt For standard IEEE 802 11ad signals a sample rate of 2 64 GHz is used requires the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 The valid sample rates are described in chapter 4 6 Max Sam ple Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B2000 on page 43 Default unit HZ Manual operation See Sample Rate on page 72 Configuring Triggered Measurements The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement in a remote environment The tasks for manual operation are described in chapter 5 2 4 Trigger Settings on page 72 The OPC command should be used after commands that retrieve data so that subse quent commands to change the selected trigger source are held off until after the sweep is completed and the data has been returned e Configuring the Triggering Conditions 142 Configuring the Trigger CHE ssecccesiedaacersadseenncrsesscencasracvas teaccdaeeasaesabeancavenmeaces 146 Configuring the Triggering Conditions The following commands are required to configure a triggered measurement TRIGE SEQUENCE DTIME cutn rte aane Ye Ra etae ree eo totae rere enhn A 143 TRIGger SEQuence HOLBof TIME 2 2 2221 ruere cheats nth od aeo ra nb uer rint eus 143 TRIGger SEQuencellF Power e EE 143 TRIGger SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis eese enne e
202. number of samples of the UO data For multi channel signals all chan nels have the same number of samples One sample can be e A complex number represented as a pair of and Q values e A complex number represented as a pair of magnitude and phase values Areal number represented as a single real value See also Format element Clock Contains the clock frequency in Hz i e the sample rate of the I Q data A signal gen erator typically outputs the UO data at a rate that equals the clock frequency If the UO data was captured with a signal analyzer the signal analyzer used the clock fre quency as the sample rate The attribute unit must be set to Hz Format Specifies how the binary data is saved in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element Every sample must be in the same format The format can be one of the following complex Complex number in cartesian format i e and Q values interleaved and Q are unitless real Real number unitless polar Complex number in polar format i e magnitude unitless and phase rad values interleaved Requires DataType float32 or f1oat64 DataType Specifies the binary format used for samples in the UO data binary file see DataFilename element and chapter A 2 2 I Q Data Binary File on page 215 The following data types are allowed int8 8 bit signed integer data int16 16 bit signed integer data int32 32 bit signed integer data float32 32 bit floati
203. o the application provided it has the correct format Furthermore the evaluated 1 Q data from the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application can be exported for further analysis in exter nal applications For details on importing and exporting UO data see the R amp S FSW User Manual MMEMom EOADAICES TAG x tatc ert oae eaae ree er eec ela edd ceca 200 MMEMory STORe lt n O COMMe itis 2 2 na roe a Dee v Lud ee v ER a ed PERRA 200 MMEMaory STORES AO STA VE 201 MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command restores UO data from a file The file extension is iq tar Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example Loads IQ data from the specified file Usage Setting only Manual operation See UO Import on page 96 MMEMory STORe lt n gt IQ COMMent lt Comment gt This command adds a comment to a file that contains UO data The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Retrieving Results Parameters lt Comment gt String containing the comment Example MMEM STOR IQ COMM Device test 1b Creates a description for the export file MMEM STOR IQ STAT 1 C R_S Instr user data ig tar Stores UO data and the comment to the specified file Manual operation See UO Export on page 96 MMEMory STORe lt n gt 1Q STATe 1 lt FileName gt This command writes the captured UO data to a file The suffix lt n gt is irrelevant The file extension is iq tar By default t
204. oes not automatically finish executing before the next com mand starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous command Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Default unit This is the unit used for numeric values if no other unit is provided with the parame ter e Manual operation If the result of a remote command can also be achieved in manual operation a link to the description is inserted Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letters Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets n next to the keyword 9 2 4 9 2 5 9 2 6 Introduction If you don t quote a suffix for keywords that support one a 1 is assumed Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt
205. of the application the missing pre or post trigger values are filled up with zeros Superfluous samples in the file are dropped if necessary For pre User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 37 R amp S FSW K95 Measurement Basics trigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the beginning of the capture buffer for post trigger samples values are filled up or omitted at the end of the capture buffer 4 3 3 Input from Noise Sources The R amp S FSW provides a connector NOISE SOURCE CONTROL with a voltage sup ply for an external noise source By switching the supply voltage for an external noise Source on or off in the firmware you can activate or deactive the device as required External noise sources are useful when you are measuring power levels that fall below the noise floor of the R amp S FSW itself for example when measuring the noise level of an amplifier In this case you can first connect an external noise source whose noise power level is known in advance to the R amp S FSW and measure the total noise power From this value you can determine the noise power of the R amp S FSW Then when you measure the power level of the actual DUT you can deduct the known noise level from the total power to obtain the power level of the DUT The noise source is controlled in the Output settings see Noise Source on page 65 4 3 4 Receiving and Providing Trigger Signals Using one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors of the R a
206. of the required configuration settings Additional background information is available in the Rohde amp Schwarz White Paper 1MA220 802 11ad WLAN at 60 GHz A Technology Introduction 4 1 Characteristics of the IEEE 802 11ad Standard The popular wireless transmission standard WLAN IEEE 802 11 has been amended and updated regularly since it was first published in order to accomodate for constant demands of transmitting higher data rates and larger bandwidths Multimedia data streams for example require very high throughput over large periods of time To meet this need the Wireless Gigabit Alliance WiGig has developed a specification for wireless transmission of data in the 60 GHz band at speeds in the multi Gigabit range Thus the 11ad physical layer was added as an amendment to the existing WLAN standard in chapter 21 of the 802 11 2012 standard 1 It is called Directional Multi Gigabit DMG PHY or short PHY Used bandwidths The outstanding new feature of the IEEE 802 11ad standard is the use of the 60 GHz band however in order to maintain compatibility with existing WLAN devices the 2 4 GHz and 5 GHz ranges defined by the IEEE 802 11a b g and n standards are also supported In the range around 60 GHz an unlicensed frequency band is available everywhere in the world This range permits higher channel bandwidths for greater throughput Another advantage is the small wavelengths approx 5 mm These make it poss
207. on Setting a bit causes a 0 to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel 9 12 Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad applica tion This example demonstrates how to configure a IEEE 802 11ad measurement in a remote environment e Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy for IEEE 802 11ad Signals 207 e Measurement 2 Determining the Spectrum Emission Mask 209 9 12 1 Measurement 1 Measuring Modulation Accuracy for IEEE 802 11ad Signals This example demonstrates how to configure a IEEE 802 11ad UO measurement according to the IEEE 802 11ad standard in a remote environment Note that some commands may not be necessary as they reflect the default settings but are included to demonstrate the commands Preparing the application Preset the instrument RST Enter the 802 11ad option K95 INSTrument SELect WiGig Switch to single sweep mode and stop sweep INITiate CONTinuous OFF ABORt eeneg Configuring the result display Activate following result displays 1 Magnitude Capture default top 2 Bitstream of
208. onding IEEE 802 11ad standard Different result displays are available for the bitstream of either the header or the pay load data and depending on whether the bits are decoded using the IEEE 802 11ad specific LDPC decoder or shown as raw data 1 Bitstream Data Decoded Octet ege Index 0 0 01000011 11110011 01100111 000110 9 10001000 10111001 11010001 000010 18 10101000 10011000 11010001 001111 27 01001001 10100010 00111011 000001 36 01111011 10101010 11101001 000000 45 01010100 11001000 10010110 101111 54 01101111 00110110 10111010 011011 b Fig 3 7 Bitstream result display Note that the raw and the decoded bitstreams only differ from each other when bit errors have occurred The PPDU number refers to the number in the capture buffer The symbol index refers to the position relative to the analyzed PPDU start The bitstream shows one value per symbol for each PPDU Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH DBST LAY ADD 1 RIGH DDBS LAY ADD 1 RIGH HBST LAY ADD 1 RIGH HDBS See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 1 Bitstream on page 195 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 19 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays WEE eee eS ae ee Channel Frequency Response The Channel frequency response trace shows the amplitude of the channel transfer function vs frequency 4 Channel Frequency Response ei Mine2 Avge 3 Max CF 13
209. opFreq gt lt RBW gt lt PeakFreq gt lt PowerAbs gt lt PowerRel gt lt PowerDelta gt lt Limit Check gt lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt lt No gt range number lt StartFreq gt lt StopFreq gt start and stop frequency of the range RBW resolution bandwidth lt PeakFreq gt frequency of the peak in a range lt PowerAbs gt absolute power of the peak in dBm lt PowerRel gt power of the peak in relation to the channel power in dBc lt PowerDelta gt distance from the peak to the limit line in dB positive values indicate a failed limit check lt LimitCheck gt state of the limit check 0 PASS 1 FAIL e lt Unused1 gt lt Unused2 gt reserved 0 0 TRACe lt n gt DATA X lt TraceNumber gt This command queries the horizontal trace data for each sweep point in the specified window for example the frequency in frequency domain or the time in time domain measurements This is especially useful for traces with non equidistant x values e g for SEM or Spuri ous Emissions measurements Query parameters lt TraceNumber gt Trace number TRACE1 TRACE6 Example TRAC3 X TRACE1 Returns the x values for trace 1 in window 3 Usage Query only TRACe IQ DATA MEMory lt OffsetSamp gt lt NumSamples gt Returns all the UO trace data in the capture buffer The result values are scaled in Volts The command returns a comma separated list of the measured voltage values in floating point fo
210. ope ALIGnment STEP STATe 131 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope ALIGnment DATE esses 131 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope IDN sseseseseeeeeee eene 131 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHoscope LEDGtate se seeseeoeeeeeers rerne renen nenene 132 Gv Tem CGOMMunicateRDEVice OGCHloscope TChim 132 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VDEVice essen 132 SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope VFIRmware sese 133 TRIGger SEQuenca OSCilloscope COUPling errato edu s oto caeco ae 133 EXPort WAVeform DISPlayoff lt FastExport gt Enables or disables the display update on the oscilloscope during data acquisition with the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 As soon as the R amp S FSW B2000 is activated see B2000 State on page 61 the dis play on the oscilloscope is turned off to improve performance during data export As soon as the R amp S FSW closes the connection to the oscilloscope the display is reacti vated and the oscilloscope can be operated as usual However if the LAN connection is lost for any reason the display of the oscilloscope remains deactivated Use this command to re activate it Parameters lt FastExport gt ON OFF ON Disables the display update for maximum export speed OFF Enables the display update The export is slower RST ON SYSTem COMMunicate RDEVice OSCilloscope STATe
211. ote A IF Out Ee 65 IF source remote go lee EE 38 65 Paramilbrs ioo aE 36 Settings Trigger or Overload FRESIN PUL Seccion rera teme n ten repe e testo 36 RF input remote mtt nectit 115 Overview Configuring IEEE 802 11ad measurements 45 P Parameter tables Corifig ratlOni iicet ne rr ne renes 80 Parameters Frontend e ennie ai a a 39 IEEE 802 11ad iB Input signal a 36 OULDUL e 36 Peak list Evaluation method 2 rete 30 Phase drift eler lee 78 Phase Error vs symbol trace data A 197 Phase Error vs Preamble Result displays Phase trackirig EE Phase Tracking vs Symbol result display sess 25 Phase Tracking vs Symbol Trace data 5 oer eee rtg 197 Ports External Mixer Remote control 123 Power Spectrum result display sssssssss 25 VC He 25 vs ime See PVT nee meson 26 27 PPDU Amount to analyze eere ters 150 Amount to analyze remote 150 Count remote 185 Level errors ssss 78 149 Maximum length remote sees 152 Minimum length remote 152 Number to analyze 44151 Number to analyze remote eA BA Phase drift errem teens 78 PPDUs Evaluation range rrr e etre 87 Preamplifier SOLO EE 49 71 e 49 71 Preset Bands
212. ous evaluation methods All eval uation methods available for the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application are displayed in the evaluation bar in SmartGrid mode Drag one or more evaluations to the display area and configure the layout as required Up to 16 evaluation methods can be displayed simultaneously in separate windows The IEEE 802 11ad evaluation methods are described in chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 18 To close the SmartGrid mode and restore the previous softkey menu select the 2 Close icon in the righthand corner of the toolbar or press any key For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Access Overview Select Measurement Modulation Accuracy or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt Modulation Accuracy IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement When you activate the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application an UO measurement of the input signal is started automatically with the default configuration The IEEE 802 11ad menu is displayed and provides access to the most important configuration functions The Span Bandwidth Lines and Marker Functions menus are not available for IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy measurements Gk ke Co Overview Multiple access paths to functionality The easiest way to configure a measurement channel is via the
213. p and 3 Marker Table to the center 50 of the screen i e in the fig ure above to the left User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 161 Configuring the Result Display Example LAY SPL 1 4 70 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Sweep and 3 Marker Peak List towards the top 70 of the screen The following commands have the exact same effect as any combination of windows above and below the splitter moves the splitter vertically AY SPL 3 2 70 AY SPL 4 1 70 AY SPL 2 1 70 LAY out WINDow lt n gt ADD lt Direction gt lt WindowType gt This command adds a measurement window to the display Note that with this com mand the suffix n determines the existing window next to which the new window is added as opposed to LAYout ADD WINDow for which the existing window is defined by a parameter To replace an existing window use the LAYout WINDow lt n gt REPLace command This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result Parameters Direction LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow lt WindowType gt Type of measurement window you want to add See LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 for a list of availa ble window types Return values lt NewWindowName gt When adding a new window the command returns its name by default the same as its number as a result Example LAY WIND1 ADD LEFT MTAB Result 2 Adds
214. page 87 The trigger position is indicated by a vertical red line if it lies within the displayed x axis span R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays 1 Magnitude Capture Fig 3 8 Magnitude capture display for single PPDU evaluation Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH MCAP see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 6 Magnitude Capture on page 197 Phase Error vs Symbol Displays the phase error values in degrees or radians per symbol The phase error is calculated as the difference between the ideal reference signal and the measured sig nal with any active compensation applied Thus this result display shows the remain ing phase error that has not been compensated for by phase tracking Tip The Phase Tracking vs Symbol result display shows the actual compensation val ues that were applied by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 83 Phase Error vs Symbol 1 sym 23232 sym Vertical lines indicate the start of the next PPDU The numbers at the bottom of the lines indicate the corresponding symbol positions Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PEVS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 7 Phase Error vs Symbol on page 197 User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 24 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays Phase Tracking vs Symbol Shows the average compensated phase drif
215. played depends on the selected meaurement and evaluation The selected evaluation method not only affects the result display in a window but also the results of the trace data query in remote control see TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 192 All evaluations available for the selected IEEE 802 11ad measurement are displayed in SmartGrid mode O For details on working with the SmartGrid see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual The IEEE 802 11ad measurements provide the following evaluation methods EE 19 Channel Frequency Response ooi darse rer rire aded ri tested 20 COn O PERO VENERE S RN UMEN EE RENE UE 20 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays EVM vs SymbOl ace cain fette edd eset iae D deter sedet ae a Ee 21 Feo Enor vs Symbol oun ed neo oi Enim ans 21 Header MOrmatOM c eoe ENEE Recte ehe kon edcu a ERR SU 2 ERU Lo Ro enkai dn 22 Magnitude CAPITE ERR 23 Phase Error vs Symbol x ree E E TETS 24 Phase Tracking VS SYMON EE 25 POWER SPC CU MR P 25 PVT Nan 26 bd RISING BOG ei RD S 26 PVE Falling e Te EU 27 Fes SUMMI oerion N tl exc te dn ear do da 27 Bitstream This result display shows a data stream for all analyzed PPDUs of the currently cap tured UO data as indicated in the Magnitude Capture display The bitstream is derived from the constellation diagram points using the constellation bit encoding from the corresp
216. quence and where appropriate also in human readable form beneath the bit sequence for each PPDU ee User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 22 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Table 3 3 Results for Header Info result display Parameter Description MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme MCS index of the PPDU as defined in IEEE Std 802 11 2012 section 21 2 2 TXVECTOR and RXVECTOR parameters lower value human readable value DMG PHY Type single carrier SC or control PHY OFDM currently not supported see Types of PHYs on page 33 Length Length of the PPDU in symbols Training Length Length of the optional beam forming training field see Beamforming on page 34 HCS Header check sum CRC lower value human readable value The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chapter 9 10 4 5 Header Info on page 197 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH HEAD see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 5 Header Info on page 197 Magnitude Capture The Magnitude Capture Buffer display shows the magnitude vs time for the complete range of captured data for the last sweep Green bars at the bottom of the Magnitude Capture Buffer display indicate the positions of the analyzed PPDUs A single green bar may indicate the the evaluation range is limited to a single PPDU see PPDU to Analyze Index of Specific PPDU on
217. r remote ssssssssseene 144 RE Power remote eid cert ette 145 Bebe 74 External 74 Free Run 2 74 UO Power 75 IF Power iso E EE 75 Troubleshooting INPUT overload orem tratan ci roe ia rebns 115 U Units Reference level its rae tte i cri e et c 68 69 User manials x oro teer ing eie tees Trete ed exer OIL 6 V Vido et TI 64 134 Ww WiGig see 802 11a d EE 32 Window title bar Windows Adding remote oot rear 157 Closing REMOTE trf eee 160 163 Configurilgi derit tree rh rere roro 47 Layout remote Maximizing remote Querying remote pi Replacing remote isien Splitting remote eee ee Types remote ente Pec elaine X X value Ma Kel s oes E tees Dese ed Uece sio a des 92 Y Y axis Tue m 83 EL HE ER Remote control eerta t e vectes 163 Z Zooming Activating de le 183 Area Multiple mode remote 183 Area OMOTE eee cs rb n rr beer 182 Multiple mode remote 183 184 Dies 182 Single mode remole aurei 182
218. r Gi WR 135 SENSe FREQuency CENT er STEP eit ie Give t b Ded eee eee 136 SENSe EREQuency CENTer STEP AU TO rise aucudn e eat e kh ista D D acuti cusa iue de 136 SENSe FREQuency OFFSet SENSe MIXer BIAS HIGH fy iit tere tha et e P eed rte tte cuu HE steer ISENS IMI Xer BIAS LOW EE SENSe MIXer FREQuUeNCy FIAN DOVSrF nds c iunii intr rre rer x rre ree n arx oer eode gau 119 SENSe MIXer FREQUCNCY STAR isis iier treten rete ree eia e XR Xo EENS 119 SENS MIXer FREQUENGCY S TOP iiti ott cista en c di e e ut edis tesa ERR bad d eere E een dd 119 SENSe MIXer HARMohniG BAND PRESeLt erit ice eee n Eee HARE ED ic NEESS 120 SENSe MIXer HARMonic BAND VALue SENS MIXe HARMORnICHIGEEBS TT iaa eoa c Ee ea vanes RECO aed eaten SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGE VAlbte caa cacao recur cortar cet ENEE on te Er coger naa icona SENSe IMIXer HARMoOTnIGC EY PE it reae tgo ree ci e it EEN SENSe MIXer HARMonic BEE SENSe MIXer LOPOWE ico nre ae ener x Re ee Yee REF LERRA FOR EL POE E RENTA LEN FEY X EAE Fe RE RA EXE ESSE Red SENSe IMIXer EOSS EIGEL atten t oce CE eet tH ai leet ela SENSe MIXer EOSS TABLe HIGEL uit e dicens Du Dee Shane eee SR RIO Lese eee SENSE MIXE LOSS TABLE LOW EE SENSe IMIXer EOSSELOW netata a e i re araea er Na Taaa e ia oti SENS MIXer PORT EE SENSe MIXer RFOVerrange STATe SENSE IMIXEr SIGNA iinan tee ete tea ER ne See freto cede eed ate ae et E Ee Kegel e
219. r pilot symbols in PPDUS to analyze in capture buffer FETCh EVM PILot AVERage on page 188 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameter Description Remote command to query result UO Offset dB Transmitter center frequency leakage relative to the total Tx channel power see chapter 3 1 1 1 I Q Offset on page 15 FETCh IQOFfset AVERage on page 189 Gain Imbalance dB Amplification of the quadrature phase component of the signal relative to the amplification of the in phase component see chapter 3 1 1 2 Gain Imbal ance on page 15 FETCh GIMBalance AVERage on page 189 Quadrature Error Deviation of the quadrature phase angle from the ideal 90 see chap ter 3 1 1 3 Quadrature Offset on page 16 FETCh QUADerror AVERage on page 189 Center Frequency Error Hz Frequency error between the signal and the current center frequency of the R amp S FSW FETCh CFERror AVERage on page 188 Symbol Clock Error ppm Clock error between the signal and the sample clock of the R amp S FSW in parts per million ppm i e the symbol timing error FETCh SYMBolerror AVERage on page 190 Rise Time s The time required for the PPDU to transition from the base to the top level This is the difference between the time at which the PPDU exceeds the lower 10 96 and upper 90 thresholds FETCh RTIMe AVERage on page 189 Fall Time s The time required for the PPDU to tra
220. r the conversion loss table Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters Text Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL COMM Conversion loss table for FS 260 Manual operation See Comment on page 58 SENSe CORRection CVL DATA lt Freq gt lt Level gt This command defines the reference values of the selected conversion loss tables The values are entered as a set of frequency level pairs A maximum of 50 frequency level pairs may be entered Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt Freq gt numeric value The frequencies have to be sent in ascending order lt Level gt Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL DATA 1MHZ 30DB 2MHZ 40DB Manual operation See Position Value on page 59 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe CORRection CVL HARMonic lt HarmOrder gt This command defines the harmonic order for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can
221. rameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Switches on 30 dB preamplification Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Preamplifier on page 49 9 5 3 Signal Capturing The following commands are required to configure how much and how data is captured from the input signal e General Capture Settings esses enne nnne tns 141 e Configuring Triggered Measurements nennen 142 9 5 3 1 General Capture Settings Ez c dieu ue NENNEN TTE RE 141 Ei ETag LE 142 TRAC GOS RAG e aves 142 SENSe SWAPiq State This command defines whether or not the recorded UO pairs should be swapped I gt Q before being processed Swapping and Q inverts the sideband This is useful if the DUT interchanged the and Q parts of the signal then the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it Parameters lt State gt ON and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l OFF and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband j Q RST OFF Manual operation See Swap Q on page 72 9 5 3 2 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time Parameters lt Time gt refer to data sheet RST depends on current settings determined automati cally Example SWE TIME 10s Usage SCPI confirmed Ma
222. re defined conversion loss tables are often provided with the external mixer and can be imported to the R amp S FSW Alternatively you can define your own conversion loss tables Imported tables are checked for compatibility with the current settings before being assigned Conversion loss tables are configured and managed in the Conver sion Loss Table tab For details on importing tables see Import Table on page 57 Remote command Average for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS LOW on page 122 Table for range 1 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe LOW on page 122 Average for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS HIGH on page 122 Table for range 2 SENSe MIXer LOSS TABLe HIGH on page 122 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Basic Settings Access Overview gt Input Frontend gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings or INPUT OUTPUT gt Input Source Config gt Input Source gt External Mixer gt Basic Settings The basic settings concern general use of an external mixer They are only available if the External Mixer State is On Frequency Basic Settings Mixer Settings Conversion Loss Table External Mixer Bias Settings Range 1 Signal ID Bias Settings Range 2 Auto ID Bias Value Ce ORi 07 10 0 dB BAS SONNO E 55 L write to lt CVL table name eene ntn cae 55 LO Level Defines the LO level of the external mixer s LO port Possible values are
223. re time is too short demodulation will fail Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 142 Swap UO Activates or deactivates the inverted I Q modulation If the and Q parts of the signal from the DUT are interchanged the R amp S FSW can do the same to compensate for it On and Q signals are interchanged Inverted sideband Q j l Off and Q signals are not interchanged Normal sideband I j Q Remote command SENSe SWAPig on page 141 Trigger Settings Access Overview gt Trigger R amp S9 FSW K95 Configuration or TRIG gt Trigger Config Trigger settings determine when the input signal is measured Trigger Source Trigger In Out Source Level DI EeIUdiiun30 0s Offset Slope Hysteresis Holdoff External triggers from one of the TRIGGER INPUT OUTPUT connectors on the R amp S FSW are configured in a separate tab of the dialog box Trigger Source Trigger In Out Trigger 2 Input Output Type User Defined Tow Pulse Length Send Trigger Trigger 3 For step by step instructions on configuring triggered measurements see the main R amp S FSW User Manual ae ER Cl ER User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 73 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement E 75 EU dE C NEN TR ERE 75 L Drop Out HE 76 EE E EO NNI ET E A E A 76 MI oor NEN TET UEM 76 ME dios URINE T 76 B os eege tee ae 76 TAGGET x H U 76 E NI C a TR 77 2
224. rements and their result types chapter 4 Measurement Basics on page 32 Background information on basic terms and principles in the context of the mea surement chapter 5 Configuration on page 44 and chapter 6 Analysis on page 87 A concise description of all functions and settings available to configure measure ments and analyze results with their corresponding remote control command chapter 7 UO Data Import and Export on page 95 Description of general functions to import and export raw UO measurement data e chapter 8 How to Perform Measurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application on page 100 The basic procedure to perform each measurement and step by step instructions for more complex tasks or alternative methods chapter 9 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements on page 103 Remote commands required to configure and perform IEEE 802 11ad measure ments in a remote environment sorted by tasks Commands required to set up the environment or to perform common tasks on the instrument are provided in the main R amp S FSW User Manual Programming examples demonstrate the use of many commands and can usually be executed directly for test purposes chapter A Annex on page 211 Reference material List of remote commands Alphahabetical list of all remote commands described in the manual e Index 1 2 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSW consists of the following
225. rend displays especially when the x axis unit is not pulse number positioning a marker by defining its x axis value can be very difficult or unambiguous Thus markers can be positioned by defining the corresponding pulse number in the Marker edit field for all parameter trend displays regardless of the displayed x axis parameter The Marker edit field is displayed when you select one of the Marker softkeys Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 176 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 174 Marker Type Toggles the marker type The type for marker 1 is always Normal the type for delta marker 1 is always Delta These types cannot be changed Note If normal marker 1 is the active marker switching the Mkr Type activates an additional delta marker 1 For any other marker switching the marker type does not activate an additional marker it only switches the type of the selected marker Normal A normal marker indicates the absolute value at the defined position in the diagram 6 3 2 Markers Delta A delta marker defines the value of the marker relative to the speci fied reference marker marker 1 by default Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 173 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 175 Reference Marker Defines a marker as the reference marker which is used to determine relative analysis results delta marker values If t
226. req Error vs Preamble ussiisa 21 Header information ev remettre 22 IEEE 802118 n tr nennen 18 Magnitude Capture 429 Marker table 30 Peak lis iut te ee te eo see N 30 Phase Error vs Preambl rrr mets 24 Phase Tracking vs Symbol 4 25 Power spectrum 25 PVD Falling Edge ets 27 PyVTFullPPDU inerenti 26 PVT Rising Edge nee teens 26 Result SUMMA ENEE edd e 27 30 Result Summary items issira 80 see also Evaluation methodS eeeeseeseeereererreeree 13 Result Summary Evaluatiori MOOG rne 30 Items to display Result display Trace data Results Bilstr dm sided wali et 195 Channel frequency response ssiiiiriiserirsveisii 198 Constellation vs svmbol iiisnsnisniirisridi ssiri gni 195 Data format remote 192 202 TI WEE 87 EVM vs Symbol 196 EXPOMIAG RT 89 Frequency Error vs Symbol 196 leader loft iie EE e dr 197 Magnitude Capture eu nnn 195 197 Numeric remote eese 185 Phase Error vs Symbol s 197 Phase Tracking vs Symbol 2 197 Power Spectrum za 197 PvT Full Burst wis 197 FRESUIESUIMIMANY 53 contr te rte 195 Retrieving remote AA 184 RE remote ee etate Ue 190 Trace remote EE 191 Trace data query remote ssssss 195 Retrieving Numeric results remote eesseess 185 Results remote
227. rformed at the start of each measurement sweep and the reference level is adapted accord ingly OFF The reference level must be defined manually see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 138 ONCE Automatic power level detection is performed once at the start of the next measurement sweep and the reference level is adap ted accordingly RST ON DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Reference Level on page 68 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Offset This command defines a reference level offset for all traces lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Offset gt Range 200 dB to 200 dB RST OdB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB Manual operation See Shifting the Display Offset on page 69 INPut ATTenuation lt Attenuation gt This command defines the total attenuation for RF input If you set the attenuation manually it is no longer coupled to the reference level but the reference level is coupled to the attenuation Thus if the current reference level is not compatible with an attenuation that has been set manually the command also adjusts the reference level Parameters lt Attenuation gt Range see data sheet Increm
228. rker lt m gt X on page 176 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 174 Remote commands exclusive to retrieving marker results CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmmz X RELIVE nennen nennen nnn nnn 198 GAL OGulate spn DELTamarkersm cY EE 199 CAL GOulateem MARIGOESIISTYO EE 199 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the x axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first Retrieving Results Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position Usage Query only Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the relative position of a delta marker on the y axis If necessary the command activates the delta marker first To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 169 The unit depends on the application of the command Return values lt Position gt Position of the delta marker in relation to the reference marker or the fixed reference
229. rmat Comma Separated Values CSV The number of values returned is 2 the number of complex samples the first half being the values the second half the Q values Parameters lt OffsetSamp gt Offset of the values to be read related to the start of the capture buffer Range 0 to lt NumSamples gt 1 lt NumSamples gt Number of measurement values to be read Range 1 to lt NumSamples gt lt OffsetSa gt 9 10 4 9 10 4 1 9 10 4 2 Retrieving Results Measurement Results for TRACe lt n gt DATA TRACE lt n gt The evaluation method selected by the LAY ADD WIND command also affects the results of the trace data query see TRACe n DATA TRACE lt n gt Details on the returned trace data depending on the evaluation method are provided here No trace data is available for the following evaluation methods e Magnitude Capture e Result Summary Global Detailed For details on the graphical results of these evaluation methods see chapter 3 1 2 Evaluation Methods for IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurements on page 18 LER IUIS 195 eciam 195 e OR ee 196 e Frequency Error vs Symbol tet re teu ERE tinier 196 uo Mur 197 e Magnitude Kaptige geck EAR etre erp i erret nne Ft vases He edere hd p t tet 197 e Phase Etrof vs SyMbOl ices erede treten tt n ted ta 197 e Phase Tracking vs Symbol c eese oe a de dea 197 POWer eoe E UOTE 197 e Powervs Tite PVT erre nase ed ett avin add d
230. rs lt Length gt Pulse length in seconds Manual operation See Pulse Length on page 66 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 9 5 4 Tracking SENSE TRACking l OMGODOmbp 1rce aceti panne tutae REDER EAR etum kp Reate ae bkn nada Lp ye e nn pdt 149 SENSE TRACKING BT 149 SENSe TRACKING PHASS 2 21 22 2 2 1 oneri a ELE REENEN S RETE RYE VEL FERRE E 149 SENSE TRANG UGE EE 150 SENSe see also ee E 150 SENSe TRACking IQMComp State Activates or deactivates the compensation for UO mismatch gain imbalance quadra ture offset UO skew see chapter 3 1 1 1 I Q Offset on page 15 Parameters State ON OFF ON Compensation for gain imbalance quadrature offset and UO skew impairments is applied OFF Compensation is not applied this setting is required for mea surements strictly according to the IEEE 802 11ad standard RST OFF Manual operation See UO Mismatch Compensation on page 78 SENSe TRACking LEVel State Activates or deactivates the compensation for level variations within a single PPDU If activated the measurement results are compensated for level error on a per symbol basis Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS TRAC LEV ON Manual operation See Level Error Gain Tracking on page 78 SENSe TRACking PHASe State Activates or deactivates the compensation for phase drifts If activated the measure ment results are comp
231. s a frequency offset Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement If this value is not 0 Hz the application assumes that the input signal was frequency shifted outside the application All results of type frequency will be corrected for this shift numerically by the application Parameters Offset Range 100 GHz to 100 GHz RST 0 Hz Example FREQ OFFS 1GHZ Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Frequency Offset on page 67 9 5 2 2 Amplitude Settings The following commands are required to configure the amplitude settings in a remote environment Useful commands for amplitude settings described elsewhere INPut COUPling on page 115 SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 153 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer on page 164 Remote commands exclusive to amplitude settings GONFPigure POVWemAl TO E 137 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzlSCALelRLEVel nrn nn nn nnn nenne 138 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectzvltSCALelbRlEVelOEtzGet 138 INPUBAT Tema tion M 138 INPUtAT PemuationtA e E 139 lins pe M 139 did TT inge 139 dins pcA NR 140 IIIe TNT EHE 140 INPUCGAINSTA TE Em 141 CONFigure POWer AUTO lt Mode gt This command is used to switch on or off automatic power level detection Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters for setting and query lt Mode gt ON Automatic power level detection is pe
232. s connected to the IF OUT 2 GHZ con nector of the R amp S FSW or if a new firmware is installed on the oscilloscope a a E a ES H d The required connections between the R amp S FSW and the oscilloscope are illustrated in the dialog box Alignment consists of two steps The first step requires a temporary connection from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector on the R amp S FSW to the CH1 input on the oscil loscope To perform the alignment select the Alignment button If necessary in particular after the firmware on the oscilloscope has been updated a self alignment is performed on the oscilloscope before the actual B2000 alignment starts This may take a few minutes If the oscilloscope and the oscilloscope ADC are aligned successfully a new dialog box is displayed SSS URL c vac RM ee a a User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 62 R amp S FSW K95 Configuration Oscilloscope CH1 to FSW REF OUT 640 MHz Please connect RTO CH1 to FSW B2000 Alignment Signal Source Oscilloscope FSW Rear Panel p CH EJ i a Iz L4 Le oo A B89 00 oo oo REF OUT 10 MH TRIG IN optional z Continue Alignment For the second alignment step the connector must be disconnected from the REF OUTPUT 640 MHZ connector and instead connected to the FSW B2000 ALIGNMENT SIGNAL SOURCE connector on the R amp S FSW To continue the alignment select the Continue Alignment button After th
233. s only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt PortType gt 2 3 RST 2 Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL PORT 3 Manual operation See Mixer Type on page 59 SENSe CORRection CVL SELect lt FileName gt This command selects the conversion loss table with the specified file name If file name is not available a new conversion loss table is created This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt FileName gt String containing the path and name of the file Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Manual operation See New Table on page 56 See Edit Table on page 56 See File Name on page 58 SENSe CORRection CVL SNUMber lt SerialNo gt This command defines the serial number of the mixer for which the conversion loss table is to be used This setting is checked against the current mixer setting before the table can be assigned to the range Before this command can be performed the conversion loss table must be selected see SENSe CORRection CVL SELect on page 127 This command is only available with option B21 External Mixer installed Parameters lt SerialNo gt Serial number with a maximum of 16 characters Example CORR CVL SEL LOSS TAB 4 Selects the conversion loss table CORR CVL MIX 123 4567
234. s provided by the electronic attenuator as much as possible to reduce the amount of mechanical switching required Mechanical attenua tion may provide a better signal to noise ratio however When you switch off electronic attenuation the RF attenuation is automatically set to the same mode auto manual as the electronic attenuation was set to Thus the RF attenuation may be set to automatic mode and the full attenuation is provided by the mechanical attenuator if possible Both the electronic and the mechanical attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value For the R amp S FSW85 the mechanical attenuation can be varied only in 10 dB steps User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 70 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is displayed in the status bar Remote command INPut EATT STATe on page 140 INPut EATT AUTO on page 139 INPut EATT on page 139 Input Settings Some input settings affect the measured amplitude of the signal as well The parameters Input Coupling and Impedance are identical to those in the Input settings See chapter 5 2 2 1 Input Source Settings on page 48 Preamplifier Input Settings If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signa
235. s the external mixer band The query returns the currently selected band This command is only available if the external mixer is active see SENSe MIXer STATe on page 117 Parameters Band KA Q U V E W F D G Y J USER Standard waveguide band or user defined band Manual operation See Band on page 52 Table 9 4 Frequency ranges for pre defined bands Band Frequency start GHz Frequency stop GHz KA A 26 5 40 0 Q 33 0 50 0 U 40 0 60 0 V 50 0 75 0 E 60 0 90 0 Ww 75 0 110 0 F 90 0 140 0 D 110 0 170 0 G 140 0 220 0 J 220 0 325 0 Y 325 0 500 0 USER 32 18 68 22 default default The band formerly referred to as A is now named KA Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH STATe State This command specifies whether a second high harmonic is to be used to cover the band s frequency range Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example MIX HARM HIGH STAT ON Manual operation See Range 1 2 on page 52 SENSe MIXer HARMonic HIGH VALue lt HarmOrder gt This command specifies the harmonic order to be used for the high Second range Parameters HarmOrder numeric value Range 2 to 61 USER band for other bands see band definition Example MIX HARM HIGH 2 Manual operation See Harmonic Order on page 53 SENSe MIXer HARMonic TYPE lt OddEven gt This comm
236. sequences Fig 4 2 Phase tracking using guard intervals and golay sequences 4 2 Measurement Setup In order to perform a IEEE 802 11ad measurement with the R amp S FSW 802 11ad appli cation the following setup is required R amp S FSW K95 Measurement Basics R amp S RTO TEE ETE ex CAE e geeg Ill 9 eG R amp S FSW Fig 4 3 Measurement setup for a IEEE 802 11ad measurement with the R amp S FSW In addition to the R amp S FSW and the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application an R amp S oscillo scope is required with which the 2 GHz bandwidth can be measured For details on setting up the R amp S oscilloscope and the 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 see the R amp S FSW UO Analyzer and UO Input User Manual and the oscilloscope documentation 4 3 Receiving Data Input and Providing Data Output The R amp S FSW can analyze signals from different input sources and provide various types of output such as noise or trigger signals 4 3 1 RF Input Protection The RF input connector of the R amp S FSW must be protected against signal levels that exceed the ranges specified in the data sheet Therefore the R amp S FSW is equipped with an overload protection mechanism This mechanism becomes active as soon as the power at the input mixer exceeds the specified limit It ensures that the connection between RF input and input mixer is cut off User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 36 R amp S
237. ser Manual The latest version is available for download at the product homepage http www2 rohde schwarz com product FSW html Installation You can find detailed installation instructions in the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual or in the Release Notes Starting the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 2 1 Starting the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application The IEEE 802 11ad measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW Furthermore the optional 2 GHz bandwidth extension R amp S FSW B2000 must be installed and active in order to analyze IEEE 802 11ad signals To activate the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 1 Select the MODE key A dialog box opens that contains all operating modes and applications currently available on your R amp S FSW 2 Select the IEEE 802 11ad item 802 11ad The R amp S FSW opens a new measurement channel for the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application The measurement is started immediately with the default settings It can be configured in the IEEE 802 11ad Overview dialog box which is displayed when you select the Overview softkey from any menu see chapter 5 2 1 Configuration Overview on page 45 Multiple Measurement Channels and Sequencer Function When you activate an application a new measurement channel is created which deter mines the measurement settings for that application The same application can be acti vated with different measurement settings by creating severa
238. sideration for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of PPDUS detected in the current capture buffer If disabled all detected PPDUS in the current capture buffer are considered Parameters Value RST 1 Example SENS BURS COUN STAT ON Wei ENS BURS COUN 10 SENSe BURSt COUNt STATe lt State gt If the statistic count is enabled the specified number of PPDUs is taken into considera tion for the statistical evaluation maximally the number of PPDUs detected in the cur rent capture buffer If disabled all detected PPDUS in the current capture buffer are considered Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS BURS COUN STAT ON Wei ENS BURS COUN 10 SENSe BURSt SELect Value If single PPDU analysis is enabled see SENSe BURSt SELect STATe on page 151 the IEEE 802 11ad UO results are based on the specified PPDU If disabled all detected PPDUS in the current capture buffer are evaluated Parameters Value RST 1 Example SENS BURS SEL STAT ON SENS BURS SEL 2 Results are based on the PPDU number 2 only Manual operation See PPDU to Analyze Index of Specific PPDU on page 87 SENSe BURSt SELect STATe State Defines the evaulation basis for result displays Note that this setting is only applicable after a measurement has been performed Parameters
239. splayed and used for statistical evalua tion Parameters lt Points gt SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt AverageCount gt SENSe SWEep COUNt lt SweepCount gt This command defines the number of measurements that the application uses to aver age traces In case of continuous measurement mode the application calculates the moving aver age over the average count In case of single measurement mode the application stops the measurement and cal culates the average after the average count has been reached Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of measurements to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single measurement mode INIT WAI Starts a measurement and waits for its end Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Sweep Average Count on page 80 SENSe SWEep COUNt CURRent Usage Query only Zooming into the Display Using the Single Zoom DISPlayEWINDow n ZOONGAREA enden carne dao eene 182 DISPlayEWINBowsns ZOOM STATe6 1 cuc te ococn a ico eerte eere ape epp ah dace me aa DR ERI 183 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt ZOOM AREA lt x1 gt lt y1 gt lt x2 gt lt y2 gt This command defines the zoom area To define a zoom area you first have to turn the zoom on R amp S FSW K95 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements 1 Frequency Sweep iRm EU 1 origin of coordinate system x1 0 y1 0 2 end point of system x2 100 y2 100 3 zoom area e g x1 60 y1 30 x2 80 y2 75
240. t 1 000000000 1 275000000E 007 8 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 108782336E 009 8 057177734E 001 7 882799530E 001 2 982799530E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 2 000000000 8 500000000E 006 7 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 109000064E 009 8 158547211E 001 7 984169006E 001 3 084169006E 001 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 3 000000000 7 500000000E 006 3 500000000E 006 1 000000000E 006 2 113987200E 009 4 202708435E 001 4 028330231E 001 5 270565033 0 000000000 0 000000000 0 000000000 L Lees Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad application Table 9 11 Trace results for SEM measurement Ra Start freq Stop freq RBW Hz Freq peak Abs peak Rel peak Delta to Limit ng Hz Hz power Hz power power margin check e dBm dB result No 1 1 0000000 1 2750000 8 5000000 1 0000000 2 1087823 8 0571777 7 8827995 2 98279 0 0 0 00 00E 007 00E 006 00E 006 36E 009 34E 001 30E 001 9530E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 2 2 0000000 8 5000000 7 5000000 1 0000000 2 1090000 8 1585472 7 9841690 3 08416 0 0 0 00 00E 006 00E 006 00E 006 64E 009 11E 001 O6E 001 9006E 00 00 00 001 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 3 3 0000000 7 5000000 3 5000000 1 0000000 2 1139872 4 2027084 4 0283302 5 27056 0 0
241. t Refer to the description of each measurement type for details The main measurement configuration menus for the IEEE 802 11ad SEM measure ments are identical to the Spectrum application For details refer to Measurements in the R amp S FSW User Manual e Spectrum EMISSION MASK sists occi tertie ecrire ended eo cen ri da EE 85 5 3 4 Spectrum Emission Mask Access Overview Select Measurement SEM or MEAS Select Measurement SEM The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement shows the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the IEEE 802 11ad specifications Thus the performance of the DUT can be tested and the emissions and their distance to the limit are identi fied Note that the IEEE 802 11ad standard does not distinguish between spurious and spectral emissions The Result Summary contains a peak list with the values for the largest spectral emis sions including their frequency and power The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application performs the SEM measurement as in the Spec trum application with the following settings Table 5 1 Predefined settings for IEEE 802 11ad SEM measurements Setting Default value Number of ranges 7 Frequency Span 3 06 GHz Fast SEM OFF Sweep time 1 ms to 1 88 ms depending on range RBW 1 MHz Power reference type Peak Power Tx Bandwidth 1 88 MH
242. t Time on page 76 Triggered Measurements If a trigger is set to a falling edge Slope Falling see Slope on page 76 the measurement is to start when the power level falls below a certain level This is useful for example to trigger at the end of a burst similar to triggering on the rising edge for the beginning of a burst o Drop out times for falling edge triggers If a drop out time is defined the power level must remain below the trigger level at least for the duration of the drop out time as defined above However if a drop out time is defined that is longer than the pulse width this condition cannot be met before the final pulse so a trigger event will not occur until the pulsed signal is over Y v T Drop Out Fig 4 6 Trigger drop out time for falling edge trigger For gated measurements a combination of a falling edge trigger and a drop out time is generally not allowed 4 5 4 Trigger Holdoff The trigger holdoff defines a waiting period before the next trigger after the current one will be recognized Frame 1 Frame 2 Holdoff Fig 4 7 Effect of the trigger holdoff See Trigger Holdoff on page 76 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B2000 4 6 Max Sample Rate and Bandwidth with Activated UO Bandwidth Extension Option B2000 The bandwidth extension option R amp S FSW B2000 provides measurem
243. t in degrees or radians vs symbol for phase tracking see Phase level and timing tracking on page 34 Thus you can see which compensation has been applied by the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application Since phase tracking is performed based on data symbol blocks 512 symbols it rep resents the low frequency part of the Phase Error vs Symbol if phase tracking is off Tip The Phase Error vs Symbol result display shows the remaining phase error after compensation has been applied Note that this result display is also available if Phase Tracking is not active 3 Phase Tracking vs Symbol 1 Clrw 23232 sym Vertical lines indicate the start of the next PPDU The numbers at the bottom of the lines indicate the corresponding symbol positions Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIGH PTVS see LAYout ADD WINDow on page 157 Querying results TRACe lt n gt DATA see chapter 9 10 4 8 Phase Tracking vs Symbol on page 197 Power Spectrum This result display shows the power vs frequency values obtained from an FFT The FFT is performed over the complete data in the current capture buffer without any cor rection or compensation User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 25 R amp S FSW K95 Measurements and Result Displays S Power Spectrum CF 13 25 GHz 264 0 MHz Span 2 64 GHz The numeric trace results for this evaluation method are described in chapter 9 10 4 9 Power Spectrum on page 197 Remote command LAY ADD 1 RIG
244. t in time domain measurements pre trigger offset Pre trigger offsets are possible because the R amp S FSW captures data continuously in the time domain even before the trigger occurs See Trigger Offset on page 76 4 5 2 Trigger Hysteresis Setting a hysteresis for the trigger helps avoid unwanted trigger events caused by noise for example The hysteresis is a threshold to the trigger level that the signal must fall below on a rising slope or rise above on a falling slope before another trigger event occurs Triggered Measurements Example In the following example the second possible trigger event is ignored as the signal does not exceed the hysteresis threshold before it reaches the trigger level again on the rising edge On the falling edge however two trigger events occur as the signal exceeds the hysteresis before it falls to the trigger level the second time Trigger level Fig 4 4 Effects of the trigger hysteresis See Hysteresis on page 76 4 5 3 Trigger Drop Out Time If a modulated signal is instable and produces occassional drop outs during a burst you can define a minimum duration that the input signal must stay below the trigger level before triggering again This is called the drop out time Defining a dropout time helps you stabilize triggering when the analyzer is triggering on undesired events A T T S Drop Out Fig 4 5 Effect of the trigger drop out time See Drop Ou
245. t of the status register to be reported in the summary bit If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition will occur in the summary bit reported to the next higher level Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Negative Transition Part STATus OPERation NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC NTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt This command controls the Negative TRansition part of a register Setting a bit causes a 1 to 0 transition in the corresponding bit of the associated regis ter The transition also writes a 1 into the associated bit of the corresponding EVENt register Parameters lt BitDefinition gt Range 0 to 65535 lt ChannelName gt String containing the name of the channel The parameter is optional If you omit it the command works for the currently active channel Controlling the Positive Transition Part STATus OPERation PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt SumBit gt STATus QUEStionable SYNC PTRansition lt BitDefinition gt lt ChannelName gt These commands control the Positive TRansition part of a register Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad applicati
246. ta avg EVM Data max EVM Data min EVM Pilots avg EVM Pilots max EVM Pilots min IQ Offset avg IQ Offset max IQ Offset min Gain Imb avg Gain Imb max Gain Imb min Quad Error avg Quad Error max Quad Error lt min_CFreqErr gt lt avg_CFreqErr gt lt max_CFreqErr gt lt min_SymClockErr gt lt avg_SymClockErr gt lt max_SymClockErr gt lt min_RiseTime gt lt avg_RiseTime gt lt max_RiseTime gt lt min_FallTime gt lt avg_FallTime gt lt max_FallTime gt lt min_TimeSkew gt lt avg_TimeSkew gt lt max_TimeSkew gt lt min_TDPow gt lt avg_TDPow gt lt max_TDPow gt lt min_CrestFactor gt lt avg_CrestFactor gt lt max_CrestFactor gt Example FETC BURS ALL Result 24 259804 3 6840858 16 140923 24 202038 3 8634479 16 32444 25 87265 25 131031 24 265713 50 468945 40 341217 37 684074 0 00034274373 0 00020165637 7 5068659e 005 0 02957472 0 0350154 0 0439591 40 021568 6955 4434 29974 053 0 076774932 0 020238044 0 19806632 NAN NAN NAN NAN NAN NAN NAN NAN NAN 8 2310677 8 2265606 8 2229691 5 7754719 6 0745926 6 3284931 Usage Query only Manual operation See Result Summary on page 27 Retrieving Results FETCh CFACtor AVERage FETCh CFACtor MAXimum FETCh CFACtor MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum crest factor for the PPDU in dB For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters
247. td 802 11n 2009 IEEE 2009 40 2 4 40M 2 4G Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel IEEE 802 11n 2009 20M 5G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 IEEE 2009 20 5 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission IEEE 802 11n 2009 40M 5G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 IEEE 2009 40 5 Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel Configuring the Result Display 9 7 Manual operation The spectrum emission mask measurement is performed according to the standard Parameter value IEEE 802 11mb D08 20M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 EEE D08 20 2 A MHz transmission IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 Figure 19 17 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission in the 2 4 GHz band IEEE 802 11mb D08 40M 2 4G IEEE Std 802 11n 2009 Figure 20 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 Figure 19 18 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel in the 2 4 GHz band EEE D08 40 2 Ai IEEE 802 11mb D08 20M 5G IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 IEEE DO8 20 5 Figure 19 19 Transmit spectral mask for 20 MHz transmission in the 5 GHz band IEEE 802 11mb D08 40M 5G IEEE Draft P802 11 REVmb D8 0 March 2011 IEEE DO8 40 5 Figure 19 20 Transmit spectral mask for a 40 MHz channel in the 5 GHz band IEEE 802 11ac D1 1 20M 9 5
248. ter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only FETCh TSKew AVERage FETCh TSKew MAXimum FETCh TSKew MINimum This command returns the average maximum or minimum time skew for the PPDU in s For details see chapter 3 1 1 Modulation Accuracy Parameters on page 13 Usage Query only Numeric Results for SEM Measurements The following commands are required to retrieve the numeric results of the IEEE 802 11ad SEM measurements see chapter 3 2 SEM Measurements on page 28 In the following commands used to retrieve the numeric results for RF data the suf fixes n for CALCulate and lt k gt for LIMit are irrelevant GALGulate snsMARKerSIo X E 191 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt FAIL This command queries the result of a limit check Note that for SEM measurements the limit line suffix lt k gt is irrelevant as only one spe cific SEM limit line is checked for the currently relevant power class Retrieving Results To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single measurement mode See also INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 169 Return values lt Result gt 0 PASS 1 FAIL Example INIT WAI Starts a new sweep and waits for its end CALC LIM3 FAIL Queries the result of the check for limit line 3 Usage Query only SCPI con
249. ters for setting and query lt State gt OFF Switch the function off ON Switch the function on RST ON Manual operation See Automatic Grid Scaling on page 83 See Auto Scale Once on page 83 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MAXimum lt Value gt This command defines the maximum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 84 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MINimum Value This command defines the minimum value of the y axis for all traces in the selected result display The suffix lt t gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt lt numeric value gt RST depends on the result display The unit and range depend on the result display Configuring the Result Display Example DISP TRAC Y MIN 60 DISP TRAC Y MAX 0 Defines the y axis with a minimum value of 60 and maximum value of 0 Manual operation See Absolute Scaling Min Max Values on page 84 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe PDIVision Value This remote command determines the grid spacing on the Y axis for all di
250. that the R amp S FSW has already been set up for remote control in a net work as described in the R amp S FSW User Manual Note that basic tasks that are independant of the application are not described here For a description of such tasks see the R amp S FSW User Manual In particular this includes e Managing Settings and Results i e storing and loading settings and result data e Basic instrument configuration e g checking the system configuration customizing the screen layout or configuring networks and remote operation Using the common status registers After an introduction to SCPI commands the following tasks specific to the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application are described here e Common SUMS s ctr Itera Poen ate epe Pn unu x ene RENTEN RIS 103 io viol H 104 e Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements sss eene 109 e Selecting a Measurement entnehmen enertete snnt 113 e Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 114 e Configuring SEM Measurements on IEEE 802 11ad Signals 153 e Configuring the Result Display 155 e Stating a Measurembetit cete rte en E HER E ECL Let Hs te bra 167 LEM ANANS mM 172 e Retrieving Resulls erre mete neo RR n SIRE RR ES 184 LEE CU AICPICI MR E E E 203 e Programming Examples R amp S FSW 802 11ad application
251. that the trigger pulse level is always opposite to the constant signal level defined by the output Level setting e g for Level High a constant high signal is output to the connector until the Send Trigger button is selected Then a low pulse is provided o Providing trigger signals as output is described in detail in the R amp S FSW User Manual 4 4 Preparing the R amp S FSW for the Expected Input Signal Frontend Parameters On the R amp S FSW the input data can only be processed optimally if the hardware set tings match the signal characteristics as closely as possible On the other hand the hardware must be protected from powers or frequencies that exceed the allowed limits Therefore you must set the hardware so that it is optimally prepared for the expected input signal without being overloaded You do this using the frontend parameters Consider the following recommendations Reference level Adapt the R amp S FSW s hardware to the expected maximum signal level by setting the Reference Level to this maximum Compensate for any external attenuation or gain by defining a Reference Level offset Attenuation To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for high signal levels and to protect the R amp S FSW from hardware damage provide for a high attenuation Use AC coupling for DC input voltage Amplification To optimize the signal to noise ratio of the measurement for low signal levels the sig nal l
252. the delta marker 4 to the marker 2 Manual operation See Linking to Another Marker on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt Reference gt This command selects a reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 Parameters lt Reference gt Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 Manual operation See Reference Marker on page 93 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If necessary the command activates the delta marker first No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT2 ON Turns on delta marker 2 Manual operation See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 91 See Marker State on page 92 See Marker Type on page 92 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe Trace This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on Note that the corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank If necessary the command activates the marker first Parameters Trace Trace number the marker is assigned to Example CALC DELT2 TRAC 2 Positions delta marker 2 on trace 2 9 91 2 Analysis CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X Position This command moves a delta marker to a particular coordinate on the x axis
253. the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters Level HIGH TTL signal LOW OV RST LOW Manual operation See Trigger 2 3 on page 65 See Level on page 66 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt OTYPe lt OutputT ype gt This command selects the type of signal generated at the trigger output Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Parameters lt OutputType gt DEVice Sends a trigger signal when the R amp S FSW has triggered inter nally TARMed Sends a trigger signal when the trigger is armed and ready for an external trigger event UDEFined Sends a user defined trigger signal For more information see OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt LEVel RST DEVice Manual operation See Output Type on page 66 OUTPut TRIGger lt port gt PULSe IMMediate This command generates a pulse at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Usage Event Manual operation See Send Trigger on page 66 This command defines the length of the pulse generated at the trigger output Suffix lt port gt Selects the trigger port to which the output is sent 2 trigger port 2 front 3 trigger port 3 rear Paramete
254. the reference level are optimally adjusted to the signal level without overloading the R amp S FSW or limiting the dynamic range by an S N ratio that is too small Example ADJ LEV Usage Event Manual operation See Setting the Reference Level Automatically Auto Level on page 69 9 6 Configuring SEM Measurements on IEEE 802 11ad Signals The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application uses the functionality of the R amp S FSW base sys tem Spectrum application see the R amp S FSW User Manual to perform the IEEE 802 11ad SEM measurements The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application automatically sets the parameters to predefined settings as described in chapter 5 3 SEM Measure ments on page 84 The IEEE 802 11ad RF measurements must be activated for a measurement channel in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application see chapter 9 3 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements on page 109 For details on configuring these RF measurements in a remote environment see the Remote Commands chapter of the R amp S FSW User Manual Remote commands exclusive to SEM measurements in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application MMEMony LOAD SEM STA VE 153 SENSEI FOWer EE 154 SENSe POWerSEM CUASS ioiii rarior prre xcu aipania Rp en UR apada aa naaa EEN e 155 MMEMory LOAD SEM STATe lt 1 gt lt Filename gt This command loads a spectrum emission mask setup from an xml file Note that this command is maintained for compatibility reasons only Use the SENS
255. tion types depend on the selected application some parameters for the following commands also depend on the selected measure ment channel Be Dee ET Dee E 157 Bd Dee IEN le KEE 159 LAY out DENGUEWIBNDONW iioii uoce uci eniti ti ce tete ee dan ete eee 159 LAY out REMoveD le EE 160 LAYouEREPLacebWINDawg 2 c recette enacted e ret En or pi texta 160 Be 160 LAY cut WINDOW SM ADD E 162 LAYoutWINDow sn IDENIfy oiana etate rtr nare bran aneia EEEN ee AS Eaa 162 LAYOUEWINDow sii gt REMOVE vec cuc ce reti eee teer eene dn eade gee ERR 163 Been 163 LAYout ADD WINDow lt WindowName gt lt Direction gt lt WindowT ype gt This command adds a window to the display in the active measurement channel This command is always used as a query so that you immediately obtain the name of the new window as a result To replace an existing window use the LAYout REPLace WINDow command Parameters lt WindowName gt String containing the name of the existing window the new win dow is inserted next to By default the name of a window is the same as its index To determine the name and index of all active windows use the LAYout CATalog WINDow query lt Direction gt LEFT RIGHt ABOVe BELow Direction the new window is added relative to the existing win dow lt WindowType gt text value Type of result display evaluation method you want to add See the table below for available parameter values Return valu
256. trum Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are 9 3 Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Activating IEEE 802 11ad measurements IEEE 802 11ad measurements require a special application on the R amp S FSW R amp S FSW K91 The measurement is started immediately with the default settings D These are basic R amp S FSW commands listed here for your convenience INSTr ment CREate DUPLcale 2 ra rire seed rer aote enata aoa scence dee 109 INS Trumen CREISE NEW E 109 INSTr mesnt E REale REPLACE nitent rati e roi tr etd ai cfe oe rep pda deren Re 110 INS Tiiment DEL ete e a A aA AE aS E ETE EE EEE 110 d Euro nud UST acr aE E EAE EE EE EaR ii 110 INS iS tt RENAME ocu ede quet eme eu poop aec Eaa a
257. tude Output B2000 Frequency External Input Coupling Mixer Preamplifier IQ File Radio Frequency States iue e Gp etia usce ruant ninini niian Aiei ani aiiai 48 aA eU o DE 49 Preamplifiers n a naaa ana a aa 49 Radio Frequency State Activates input from the RF INPUT connector Remote command INPut SELect on page 115 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Input Coupling The RF input of the R amp S FSW can be coupled by alternating current AC or direct cur rent DC AC coupling blocks any DC voltage from the input signal This is the default setting to prevent damage to the instrument Very low frequencies in the input signal may be dis torted However some specifications require DC coupling In this case you must protect the instrument from damaging DC input voltages manually For details refer to the data sheet Remote command INPut COUPling on page 115 Preamplifier If the optional Preamplifier hardware is installed a preamplifier can be activated for the RF input signal You can use a preamplifier to analyze signals from DUTs with low input power For R amp S FSW26 or higher models the input signal is amplified by 30 dB if the pream plifier is activated For R amp S FSWS or 13 models the following settings are available Off Deactivates the preamplifier 15 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 15 dB 30 dB The RF input signal is amplified by about 30 d
258. uch as the UO Analyzer or optional applications Capturing and exporting UO data 1 Press the PRESET key 2 Press the MODE key and select the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application or any other application that supports UO data Configure the data acquisition Press the RUN SINGLE key to perform a single sweep measurement Select the E Save icon in the toolbar Select the I Q Export softkey In the file selection dialog box select a storage location and enter a file name oN o a B o Select Save The captured data is stored to a file with the extension iq tar Using exported UO data as an input source 1 Press the MODE key and select the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 2 If necessary switch to single sweep mode by pressing the RUN SINGLE key 3 Select the Input Frontend button and switch to the Input Source IQ File tab 4 Select Select File 5 In the file selection dialog box select the file that contains the exported UO data iq tar extension How to Export and Import I Q Data 6 Set the I Q file state to On 7 Select the Frequency tab to define the input signal s center frequency 8 Start anew measurement with the data from the file e To perform a single sweep measurement press the RUN SINGLE hardkey e To perform a continuous sweep measurement press the RUN CONT hardkey Importing UO data 1 Press the MODE key and select the IQ Analyzer or any other application that supports UO
259. uency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Parameters lt Frequency gt The allowed range and fmax is specified in the data sheet UP Increases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command DOWN Decreases the center frequency by the step defined using the SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP command RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Usage SCPI confirmed Manual operation See Center frequency on page 67 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt fmax iS specified in the data sheet Range 1 to fMAX RST 0 1 x span Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz FREQ CENT STEP 10 MHz FREQ CENT UP Sets the center frequency to 110 MHz Manual operation See Center Frequency Stepsize on page 67 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO lt State gt This command couples or decouples the center frequency step size to the span Parameters lt State gt ON OFF 0 1 RST 1 Example FREQ CENT STEP AUTO ON Activates the coupling of the step size to the span SENSe FREQuency OFFSet lt Offset gt This command define
260. upling of the external trigger to the oscilloscope Parameters lt CoupType gt Coupling type DC Direct connection with 50 O termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal CDLimit Direct connection with 1 MQ termination passes both DC and AC components of the trigger signal AC Connection through capacitor removes unwanted DC and very low frequency components RST DC 9 5 1 5 Configuring the Outputs Configuring trigger input output is described in Configuring the Trigger Output on page 146 Configuring the IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement DIAGNOSTIC Ee le 134 OUTPUEIFAFRREGUCICY E 134 QUMPUEIFE SOURCE E 134 DIAGnostic SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command turns the 28 V supply of the BNC connector labeled NOISE SOURCE CONTROL on the R amp S FSW on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON Manual operation See Noise Source on page 65 OUTPut IF IFFRequency Frequency This command defines the frequency for the IF output of the R amp S FSW The IF fre quency of the signal is converted accordingly This command is available in the time domain and if the IF VIDEO DEMOD output is configured for IF Parameters Frequency RST 50 0 MHz Manual operation See IF Wide Out Frequency on page 65 OUTPut IF SOURce Source Defines the type of signal available
261. wed for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis The number of payload symbols is defined as the uncoded bits including service and tail bits If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command has been set to true then this command has no effect Parameters lt NumDataSymbols gt RST 64 SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols MIN lt NumDataSymbols gt If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command has been set to true then this command specifies the exact number of payload symbols a PPDU must have to take part in measurement analysis If the SENSe DEMod FORMat BANalyze SYMBols EQUal command is set to false this command specifies the minimum number of payload symbols required for a PPDU to take part in measurement analysis The number of payload symbols is defined as the uncoded bits including service and tail bits Parameters lt NumDataSymbols gt RST 1 Example SENS DEM FORM BAN SYMB EQU ON SENS DEMO FORM BANA SYMB MIN Configuring SEM Measurements on IEEE 802 11ad Signals 9 5 6 Automatic Settings Remote commands exclusive to automatic configuration SERIES ed EE de EE ee EE 153 SENSe ADJust LEVel This command initiates a single internal measurement that evaluates and sets the ideal reference level for the current input data and measurement settings This ensures that the settings of the RF attenuation and
262. wever some registers are used differently Only those differences are described in the following sections For details on the common R amp S FSW status registers refer to the description of remote control basics in the R amp S FSW User Manual Status Registers o RST does not influence the status registers 9 11 1 e The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register 204 e Querying the Status Regieters enne nnn 204 The STATus QUEStionable SYNC Register The STATus QUEStionable SYNC register contains application specific information about synchronization errors or errors during pilot symbol detection If any errors occur in this register the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register is set to 1 9 11 2 Each active channel uses a separate STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Thus if the status bit 11 in the STATus QUEStionable register indicates an error the error may have occurred in any of the channel specific STATus QUEStionable SYNC reg isters In this case you must check the register of each channel to determine which channel caused the error By default querying the status of a register always returns the result for the currently selected channel However you can specify any other chan nel name as a query parameter Table 9 10 Meaning of the bits used in the STATus QUEStionable SYNC register Bit No Meaning 0 PPDU not found This bit is set if an UO measurement is performed and no PPDUs ar
263. which objects the result displays are based on PPDU Analysis Selection in Current Capture PPDU to Analyze AU PPDUs Specific PPDU Index of Specific PPDU Fig 6 1 Evaluation range settings PPDU to Analyze 7 Index of Specific GR UE EE 87 PPDU to Analyze Index of Specific PPDU If All PPDUs is enabled the I Q results are based on all PPDUs in the current capture buffer R amp S FSW K95 Analysis If Specific PPDU is enabled the IEEE 802 11ad I Q results are based on one individ ual PPDU only namely the one with the specified index The result displays are upda ted to show the results for the the new evaluation range The selected PPDU is marked by a blue bar in PPDU based results see on page 23 Note Note that this setting is only applicable after a measurement has been per formed As soon as a new measurement is started the evaluation range is reset to all PPDUS in the current capture buffer Remote command St SELect STATe on page 151 SESS gt t on page 151 6 2 Trace Configuration Access TRACE gt Trace Config Traces Trace Data Export Trace Modes cD GE zonfig Eo 1 PVT Falling User Manual 1177 5962 02 01 88 Trace Configuration For the Power vs Time and Channel Frequency Response result displays a maximum of three traces are available for all other result displays in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application only one trace is available The trace modes cannot be change
264. win dows on each side of the splitter Compared to the DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SIZE on page 156 command the LAYout SPLitter changes the size of all windows to either side of the splitter per manently it does not just maximize a single window temporarily R amp S FSW K95 Remote Commands for IEEE 802 11ad Measurements Note that windows must have a certain minimum size If the position you define con flicts with the minimum size of any of the affected windows the command will not work but does not return an error y 100 x 100 y 100 1 01 GHz 102 12 dim x 0 y 0 x 100 Fig 9 1 SmartGrid coordinates for remote control of the splitters Parameters lt Index1 gt The index of one window the splitter controls Index2 The index of a window on the other side of the splitter Position New vertical or horizontal position of the splitter as a fraction of the screen area without channel and status bar and softkey menu The point of origin x 0 y 0 is in the lower left corner of the screen The end point x 100 y 100 is in the upper right cor ner of the screen See figure 9 1 The direction in which the splitter is moved depends on the screen layout If the windows are positioned horizontally the splitter also moves horizontally If the windows are positioned vertically the splitter also moves vertically Range 0 to 100 Example LAY SPL 1 3 50 Moves the splitter between window 1 Frequency Swee
265. y of the measured values e g transducer or trigger settings This information is dis played only when applicable for the current measurement For details see the R amp S FSW Getting Started manual Window title bar information For each diagram the header provides the following information 2 Magnitude Capture Fig 2 1 Window title bar information in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application 1 Window number 2 Window type 3 Trace color 4 Trace number 6 Trace mode Diagram footer information The diagram footer beneath the diagram contains the start and stop values for the displayed x axis range Status bar information Global instrument settings the instrument status and any irregularities are indicated in the status bar beneath the diagram Furthermore the progress of the current operation is displayed in the status bar Click on a displayed warning or error message to obtain more details see also IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement 3 Measurements and Result Displays The R amp S FSW 802 11ad application provides several different measurements in order to determine the parameters described by the IEEE 802 11ad specifications e IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement A 13 SEM eelere orent e Pre EEN 28 3 1 IEEE 802 11ad Modulation Accuracy Measurement Access Overview Select Measurement Modulation Accuracy or MEAS gt Select Measurement gt Modulation Accuracy T
266. z Number of power classes 1 For further details about the Spectrum Emission Mask measurements refer to Spec trum Emission Mask Measurement in the R amp S FSW User Manual SEM Measurements To restore adapted measurement parameters the following parameters are saved on exiting and are restored on re entering this measurement e Reference level and reference level offset e Sweep time e Span The main measurement menus for the SEM measurements are identical to the Spec trum application Remote command SENS SWE MODE SEM Evaluation Range 6 Analysis After a IEEE 802 11ad measurement has been performed you can analyze the results in various ways Analysis of SEM measurements General result analysis settings concerning the trace markers lines etc for RF mea surements are identical to the analysis functions in the Spectrum application except for some special marker functions and spectrograms which are not available in the R amp S FSW 802 11ad application For details see the Common Analysis and Display Functions chapter in the R amp S FSW User Manual The remote commands required to perform these tasks are described in chapter 9 9 Analysis on page 172 e Evaluation Bn EEN 87 e Trace Configltallol da esee operas ast ae teeta eaten 88 XU uu cM EP 90 6 1 Evaluation Range Access Overview Evaluation Range or MEAS CONFIG gt Evaluation Range The evaluation range defines

R&S®FSW-K95 802.11ad Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FSW-K95 802.11ad Measurements User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FSW-K95 802.11ad Measurements User Manual